August 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
F-150
Litho in U.S.A.
GL3J 19A321 AA
2016 F-150 Owner’s Manual
owner.ford.com ford.ca
2016 F-150 Owner’s Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 08/2015 20150731195114
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................11
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................13
Export Unique Options..................................13
Environment
Protecting the Environment........................14
Child Safety
General Information.......................................15
Installing Child Restraints............................16
Booster Seats..................................................28
Child Restraint Positioning.........................30
Child Safety Locks...........................................31
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation...................................33
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................34
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................38
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................39
Seatbelt Reminder........................................39
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................41
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..........................42
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation..................................43
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................44
Front Passenger Sensing System............45
Side Airbags.....................................................47
Safety Canopy™............................................48
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......49
Airbag Disposal..............................................50
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................51
Remote Control...............................................51
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................56
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................57
Creating a MyKey...........................................58
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................58
Checking MyKey System Status...............59
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems........................................................60
MyKey Troubleshooting..............................60
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................62
Keyless Entry...................................................64
Tailgate
Tailgate Lock....................................................67
Manual Tailgate..............................................67
Electronic Tailgate..........................................67
Removing the Tailgate.................................68
Tailgate Step....................................................69
Bed Extender...................................................70
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................72
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................74
1
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Power Running Boards
Using Power Running Boards....................76
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................78
Audio Control...................................................79
Voice Control...................................................80
Cruise Control.................................................80
Information Display Control......................80
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals......................................81
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................82
Autowipers.......................................................82
Windshield Washers.....................................83
Lighting
Lighting Control..............................................84
Autolamps........................................................84
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................85
Daytime Running Lamps............................86
Automatic High Beam Control.................86
Front Fog Lamps............................................88
Direction Indicators.......................................88
Spot Lamps.....................................................88
Interior Lamps.................................................89
Ambient Lighting.............................................91
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................92
Exterior Mirrors................................................93
Interior Mirror....................................................97
Sliding Windows.............................................97
Sun Visors.........................................................97
Moonroof..........................................................98
Instrument Cluster
Gauges.............................................................100
Warning Lamps and Indicators...............103
Audible Warnings and Indicators............107
Information Displays
General Information....................................108
Information Messages................................124
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control.............................139
Automatic Climate Control........................141
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................142
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................145
Cabin Air Filter...............................................145
Remote Start.................................................146
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position..................147
Head Restraints.............................................147
Manual Seats.................................................149
Power Seats...................................................150
Memory Function..........................................152
Rear Seats.......................................................154
Heated Seats.................................................154
Climate Controlled Seats..........................155
Front Seat Armrest.......................................157
Rear Seat Armrest........................................157
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener...............158
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points................................162
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................164
2
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Overhead Console.......................................165
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................166
Ignition Switch...............................................166
Keyless Starting............................................166
Starting a Gasoline Engine........................167
Engine Block Heater....................................170
Unique Driving Character-
istics
Auto-Start-Stop............................................172
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions.......................................174
Fuel Quality.....................................................175
Fuel Quality.....................................................175
Running Out of Fuel.....................................176
Refueling...........................................................177
Fuel Consumption........................................178
Emission Control System..........................179
Transmission
Automatic Transmission............................182
Four-Wheel Drive
Using Four-Wheel Drive............................188
Rear Axle
Electronic Locking Differential................196
Brakes
General Information....................................198
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................198
Parking Brake.................................................198
Electric Parking Brake.................................199
Hill Start Assist..............................................201
Traction Control
Principle of Operation................................203
Using Traction Control...............................203
Stability Control
Principle of Operation...............................204
Using Stability Control..............................205
Terrain Response
Principle of Operation................................207
Using Hill Descent Control.......................207
Parking Aids
Parking Aid.....................................................209
Active Park Assist.........................................210
Rear View Camera........................................214
360 Degree Camera.....................................217
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation................................220
Using Cruise Control...................................220
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................221
Driving Aids
Driver Alert......................................................228
Lane Keeping System................................228
Blind Spot Information System..............232
Cross Traffic Alert........................................234
Steering............................................................237
Collision Warning System........................238
Load Carrying
Load Retaining Fixtures..............................241
Load Limit.......................................................242
Bed Access....................................................248
Bed Ramps....................................................249
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................252
3
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™......................253
Trailer Sway Control...................................262
Recommended Towing Weights...........262
Essential Towing Checks..........................269
Towing Points................................................276
Transporting the Vehicle............................277
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......278
Driving Hints
Breaking-In......................................................281
Economical Driving......................................281
Driving Through Water...............................282
Floor Mats.......................................................282
Snowplowing................................................283
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance..................................286
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................287
Fuel Shutoff...................................................287
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................288
Post-Crash Alert System..........................290
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need................291
In California (U.S. Only).............................292
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).....................293
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).......................294
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................294
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................295
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)............................................................296
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................296
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart..........................298
Changing a Fuse..........................................306
Maintenance
General Information...................................307
Opening and Closing the Hood..............307
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™...............................................308
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™...............................................309
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................310
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L.....................311
Engine Oil Dipstick........................................312
Engine Oil Check...........................................312
Engine Coolant Check.................................313
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.............................................................317
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................317
Brake Fluid Check.........................................318
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................318
Washer Fluid Check.....................................318
Fuel Filter.........................................................318
Changing the 12V Battery..........................318
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................320
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................320
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................321
Changing a Bulb...........................................322
Bulb Specification Chart...........................327
Changing the Engine Air Filter................329
Vehicle Care
General Information...................................330
Cleaning Products.......................................330
Cleaning the Exterior..................................330
Waxing..............................................................331
Cleaning the Engine....................................332
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................332
Cleaning the Interior...................................333
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................333
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................334
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............335
4
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................335
Vehicle Storage............................................336
Wheels and Tires
General Information...................................338
Tire Care.........................................................340
Using Snow Chains.....................................355
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........356
Changing a Road Wheel............................361
Technical Specifications..........................369
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications................................370
Motorcraft Parts............................................371
Vehicle Identification Number.................371
Vehicle Certification Label........................372
Transmission Code Designation.............373
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™................................................374
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™................................................378
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L....382
Capacities and Specifications -
5.0L...............................................................387
Audio System
General Information...................................392
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM......393
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD..................................................................395
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
SYNC...........................................................398
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio...........................400
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD.................................................................402
Digital Radio.................................................404
Satellite Radio.............................................406
USB Port.........................................................409
Media Hub.....................................................409
SYNC™
General Information....................................410
Using Voice Recognition............................412
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............414
SYNC™ Applications and Services......426
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................431
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................440
Accessories
Accessories...................................................448
Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP)..................451
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......453
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........456
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................459
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........462
Appendices
End User License Agreement..................472
Type Approvals............................................488
5
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so they may appear
different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
7
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Introduction
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten seatbelt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
8
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Introduction
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 410).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
9
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Introduction
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 410).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 410).
10
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
(U.S. Only)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as to help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit,
as well as to access Account Manager,
please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
11
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Introduction
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury. See
Supplementary Restraints System
(page 43).
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active
passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics
(OBD-II) system has a data port for
diagnostics, repair and reprogramming
services with diagnostic scan tools.
Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty
may not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in device.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and
utility type vehicles
WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Manual carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate your
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
See Snowplowing (page 283).
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package.
12
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
13
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
14
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. We recommend
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
WARNINGS
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
contact Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in
safety seats made especially for their
height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these
high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
15
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 45).
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
16
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
(Except Front Center Position of
Super Cab and Crew Cab)
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the seat is installed all the way
back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
17
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
18
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of
movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
(Front Center Position of Super
Cab and Crew Cab)
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front
seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the seat is installed all the way back.
Rear facing child seats should never
be placed in front of an active airbag.
Always use both lap and shoulder
safety belt in the center seating
position.
The belt webbing below the tongue is the
lap portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above
the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of
the combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in the
front center seat.
19
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
E162708
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
E142530
3. While holding both shoulder and lap
portions next to the tongue, route the
tongue and webbing through the child
seat according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. Be sure
that the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142533
5. While pushing down with your knee on
the child seat pull up on the shoulder
belt portion to tighten the lap belt
portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
6. Allow the safety belt to retract and
remove any slack in the belt to securely
tighten the child safety seat in the
vehicle.
7. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
20
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
8. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than 1
inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
9. Check from time to time to be sure that
there is no slack in the lap and shoulder
belt. The shoulder belt must be snug
to keep the lap belt tight during a crash.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Child Passenger
Safety Technician.
Using Inflatable Safety Belts
(Rear Seat Outboard Positions) (If
Equipped)
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
21
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable safety belt and pull
upward until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard safety belt, the
inflatable safety belt's unique lap portion
locks the child seat for installation. The
ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to
move freely is normal, even after the lap belt
has been put into the automatic locking
mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with safety belt systems that would
otherwise require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146525
22
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the vehicle seat back and
seat cushion meet (called the seat bight)
and one top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used
to attach the child seat if the lower anchors
are not used. For forward-facing child
seats, the top tether strap must also be
attached to the proper top tether anchor,
if a top tether strap has been provided with
your child seat.
Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH lower
anchors for child seat installation at the
following seating positions (LATCH is not
available on Regular Cab):
23
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E166694
E166695
The lower LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat between
the cushion and seatback. Follow the child
seat manufacturer's instructions to
properly install a child seat with LATCH
attachments.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter
on attaching child safety seats with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors
from the Outboard Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (280
millimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 25.7
inches (652 millimeters) apart. The
standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 11 inches (280 millimeters)
center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed
at the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child seats (with attachments
on belt webbing) can only be used at this
seating position provided that the child
seat manufacturer's instructions permit
use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not
attach a child seat to any lower anchor if
an adjacent child seat is attached to that
anchor.
24
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to the vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors
may be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
The passenger seats of your vehicle may
be equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as
described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be
loops of webbing above the seatback or
an anchor bracket behind the seat on the
rear edge of the seat cushion.
The rear seat in the Crew Cab and Super
Cab has three straps along the top of the
seat back that function as both routing
loops for the tether straps and anchor
loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Regular Cab
E166696
25
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E166697
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the
correct tether anchor.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH
attachments, do not tighten the tether
strap enough to lift the child seat off the
vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
Front Seat Tether Strap
Attachment (Regular Cab)
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat and under the
head restraint.
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head
restraints, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts, otherwise route the tether
strap over the top of the seat back.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position. You may
need to pull the seat back forward to
access the tether anchors. Make sure
the seat is locked in the upright position
before installing the child seat.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
Regular Cab passenger and center
seats (located on back panel)
E175295
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
26
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, Ford
also recommends its use.
Rear Seat Tether Strap
Attachment (Crew Cab and Super
Cab)
E167009
There are three loops of webbing just
above the back of the rear seat (along the
bottom edge of the rear window). Use
these loops as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child safety
seat tether straps.
For example, the center loop can be used
as a routing loop for a child safety seat in
the center rear seat and as an anchoring
loop for child seats installed in the
outboard rear seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if
the tether strap is hooked to the loop
directly behind the child seat. To provide
a tight tether strap:
E162714
1. Route the tether strap under the head
restraint and through the loop directly
behind the child seat.
E162715
2. Route the tether strap behind the head
restraint supports to a loop behind an
adjacent seating position, and hook the
strap hook onto the loop. If using the
driver side, pass the strap behind the
shoulder belt for the center seat.
Always put the tether strap through the
routing loop. The head restraint
support post will hold the child seat
tightly, but the head restraint post is
not strong enough to hold the child
seat during a crash.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
27
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, Ford
also recommends its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
28
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
29
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
WARNINGS
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
30
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
WARNINGS
children or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
Restraint
Type
Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
147).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (If Equipped)
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
31
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
32
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
33
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the pretensioners will be
activated when the Safety Canopy is
activated.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using the Safety Belt with Cinch
Tongue (Front Center Seat)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down
the belt webbing when the belt is stowed
or while putting safety belts on. When you
buckle the lap and shoulder safety belt,
the cinch tongue will allow you to shorten
the lap portion, but pinches the webbing
to keep the lap portion from getting longer.
The cinch tongue is designed to slip during
a crash, so always wear the shoulder belt
properly and do not allow any slack in
either the lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a lap and
shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into
the buckle, you may have to lengthen the
lap belt portion of it.
34
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
E162708
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some
webbing out of the shoulder belt
retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below the
tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion)
of the tongue so that it is parallel to the
webbing and slide the tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that
the tongue can reach the buckle.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue
WARNING
The lap belt should fit snugly and as
low as possible around the hips, not
across the waist.
1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the
retractor so that the shoulder belt
portion of the safety belt crosses your
shoulder and chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the
belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for your seating position until
you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue to the buckle by pulling on the
tongue.
While you are fastened in the safety belt,
the lap and shoulder belt with a cinch
tongue adjusts to your movement.
However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if
your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the safety belt will
become locked and help reduce your
forward movement.
Using Safety Belts During
Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. Position the lap belt portion of
a combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort will allow. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
35
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all safety belts should be checked
for proper function.
The belt and retractor must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature
or any other safety belt function is not
operating properly when checked by an
authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of
locking mode, and the front outboard
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both types of locking modes described as
follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly,
turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time you install a child
safety seat in a front outboard passenger
seating position in a Regular Cab,
SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seating
position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The
optional front seat's center safety belt has
a cinch mechanism. Children 12 years old
and under should be properly restrained in
a rear seat whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 15).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Non-inflatable safety belts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
36
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
Rear outboard inflatable safety belts
(second row only– if equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until the entire belt is
pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the rear inflatable safety belt.
The rear inflatable safety belts are fitted
in the shoulder portion of the safety belts
of the second-row outboard seating
positions.
Note: The rear inflatable safety belts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the safety
belt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable safety belt consists of
the following:
• An inflatable bag located in the
shoulder safety belt webbing.
• Lap safety belt webbing with
automatic locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front safety belts.
• Impact sensors located in various parts
of the vehicle.
How does the rear inflatable safety belt
system work?
The rear inflatable safety belts will
function like standard restraints in
everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
webbing.
37
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular safety belts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.
WARNING
If the rear inflatable safety belt has
deployed, it will not function again.
The rear inflatable safety belt system
must be replaced by an authorized dealer.
The rear inflatable safety belts are
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal
crashes, rollovers and some side impact
crashes. The fact that the rear inflatable
safety belt did not inflate in a crash does
not mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause
activation.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
Do not use extensions with an
inflatable safety belt.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, you can obtain a safety belt
extension assembly from an authorized
dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is located at
the end of the webbing on the label or on
the retractor behind the trim. Also, use the
safety belt extension only if the safety belt
is too short for you when fully extended.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E145664
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Pull the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
38
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder feature for objects you place
in the front passenger seat, only the front
seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
39
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being
safely belted and surviving an accident.
We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the
Belt-Minder has been previously disabled,
it will be re-enabled during the use of
MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 57).
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belt is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
you start Step 3, you must complete
the procedure within 30 seconds.
40
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle then unbuckle the safety
belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 330).
41
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage
sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
42
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To avoid risk
of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
43
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules.
• front passenger sensing system.
· crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 49).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration recommends a
minimum distance of at least 10
inches (25 centimeters) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
44
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
Cab, properly restrain the child in the
center front unless doing so would interfere
with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the
adults. A child or infant properly restrained
in the center front seat should not incur
risk of serious injury from the airbags.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the front
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always
sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system which could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
E181984
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator which
will illuminate indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled). The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack of the
instrument panel.
Note: When the ignition is first turned on,
the passenger airbag status indicator OFF
and ON lamps will illuminate for a short
period to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions:
• The front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
45
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• A passenger takes their weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing
system.
Even with this technology, parents are
strongly encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to
remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then
turn your vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from your vehicle and reinstall
the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system works
with sensors that are part of the front
passenger seat and safety belt. The
sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly seated occupant
and determine if the front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
status indicator OFF lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn your vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seatback in the full
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart your vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and enable the
passenger's frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit
even after this, you should advise the
person to ride in the rear seat.
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF lamp is illuminated, the
passenger side airbag (seat mounted) may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment issues.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
If you think that the state of the passenger
airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,
check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
46
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• Objects hanging off the seatback.
• Objects stowed in the seatback map
pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat may appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the previous list.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 49).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering
with the seat, please take the following
steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull your vehicle over.
• Turn your vehicle off.
• Driver or adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat
or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart your vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify
that the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster is no longer
illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster remains illuminated,
this may or may not be a problem due
to the front passenger sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
47
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
49).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
airbags as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
48
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front
and rear side windows identified by a
label or wording on the headliner or
roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 49).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
49
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module which deploys (activates) the
front safety belt pretensioners, optional
rear inflatable safety belts, driver airbag,
passenger airbag, seat mounted side
airbags, and the Safety Canopy®. Based
on the type of crash (frontal impact, side
impact or rollover), the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate safety
devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. See Instrument Cluster (page
100). Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration).
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners and optional rear
inflatable safety belts is to activate in
frontal, near-frontal and side crashes,
and in rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
50
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of
the following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters,
such as amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote
controls and alarm systems may operate
on the same frequency as your remote
control. If other transmitters are operating
on those frequencies, you may not be able
to use your remote control. Using your
remote control near some types of
electronic equipment, such as USB devices,
computers or cell phones can interfere with
remote operation. Operating your remote
control near metal or metallic-finished
purses, bags or clothing can interfere with
remote operation. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of the front
exterior door handle.
• You press the tailgate release button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 51).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(If Equipped)
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
51
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E191532
Press the button to release the key. Press
and hold the button to fold the key back
in when not in use.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with a
security tag that provides important vehicle
key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
E191531
Your intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door.
E176269
Slide the release on the back of the remote
control and pivot the cover off to access
the key blade.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’ s backup keys came with
a security tag that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag in
a safe place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
52
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See General Information (page
108).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key before
beginning the procedure.
E191533
1. Insert a screwdriver in the position
shown and gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
53
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses two coin-type
three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or
equivalent.
E151796
1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off.
E153890
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.
E176226
3. Remove the batteries.
4. Install new batteries with the + facing
each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory settings for the driver seat, power
mirrors, steering column and power foot
pedals.
Press the unlock button on a linked remote
control to recall the memory positions. If
you enable the easy-entry-and-exit
feature, the seat moves to the easy-entry
position. The seat moves to the driver
memory position when you put the key in
the ignition.
Linking a Preset Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
See Memory Function (page 152).
54
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to
deactivate.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from outside the vehicle. The
transmitter has an extended operating
range.
You can configure vehicles with automatic
climate control to turn on the automatic
climate control when you remote start your
vehicle. See Automatic Climate Control
(page 141). A manual climate control
system runs at the setting you set it to
when you switched off the vehicle.
Many states and provinces restrict the use
of remote start. Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work if:
• The ignition is on.
• The alarm system triggers.
• You disable the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in P.
• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
• The service engine soon light is on.
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start or
extension
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful; vehicle
off
Solid red
Remote start or
stop failed
Blinking red
Waiting for status
update
Blinking green
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
remote starts only if you follow this
sequence.
55
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch it on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 108).
Note: If you have remote started your
vehicle with an integrated keyhead
transmitter, you must switch on the ignition
before driving your vehicle. With an
intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the brake pedal before driving your
vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
the remote start and the radio does not
turn on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start period. If you programmed
the periods to last 10 minutes, the second
10 minutes begins after what is left of the
first activation time. For example, if the
vehicle has run from the first remote start
for five minutes, the vehicle continues to
run now for a total of 20 minutes. You can
extend the remote start up to a maximum
of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the
running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display.
See General Information (page 108).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 72).
56
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder.
You cannot disable this feature. The
audio system will mute when the front
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions (available only in some
markets).
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
57
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac or traction control,
911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or
Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is
equipped with these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey.
To create a MyKey:
1. Place your key into the ignition or, if
your vehicle is equipped with keyless
start, place your transmitter into the
backup position. Details on the backup
position's location are in another
chapter. See Starting a Gasoline
Engine (page 167).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu using your
left-hand-side steering wheel controls.
4. Depending on your display options,
select either Settings or Advanced
Settings, then MyKey and finally
Create MyKey.
5. When the menu reads Hold OK to
Create MyKey, press and hold the OK
button to program a MyKey.
6. The display then prompts you to
program the Configurable settings.
You can program the configurable features
now or at any time. You can advance
through the settings without programming
them by pressing the OK button. MyKey
then keeps all of the default settings.
When you finish programming your MyKey,
the Type 3 information display adds a
confirmation screen, New MyKey Has
Been Created.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to program or
change your configurable MyKey settings.
1. Place your admin key into the ignition
or, if your vehicle is equipped with
keyless start, place your admin
transmitter into the backup position.
Details on the backup position's
location are in another chapter. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
167).
2. Depending on your display options,
select either Settings or Advanced
Settings, then MyKey and finally to
various configurable features.
3. Scroll down through the choices, and
then highlight the feature you want to
configure.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the engine off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear all MyKeys within the same
key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
switch your ignition off, however, you will
need to use an admin key to clear your
MyKeys.
58
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status at once.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings,
use the information display and the
left-hand-side steering wheel controls:
1. Access the main menu and select
Settings, then MyKey and finally
Clear MyKeys.
2. Press and hold OK.
3. When you finish clearing all MyKeys,
the Type 3 information display adds a
confirmation screen, MyKey Cleared.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 108).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
59
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine
(page 167).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
• The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
60
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 72).
I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
• An admin transmitter is present at vehicle
start.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
61
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
See Electronic Tailgate (page 67).
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control at any time
your vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E187795
Press the button to unlock the driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The direction
indicators flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
allows your entire vehicle to unlock with
one press of the button. The direction
indicators flash twice to indicate a change
to the unlocking mode. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control and
keyless entry keypad.
Intelligent access at the driver door will
unlock your entire vehicle when you disable
two-stage unlocking.
Locking the Vehicle
E187796
Press the button to lock all doors. The
direction indicators flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors are closed.
Mislock
If any door is open, or if the hood is open
on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn will sound twice and
the direction indicators will not flash.
62
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Locks
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
The intelligent access key must be within
3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
At the Front Doors
Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock
and open the door. The unlock sensor is on
the back of the handle. Make sure not to
touch the lock sensor area on the front of
the handle.
E190690
Press and hold the lock sensor area for
about a second to lock your vehicle. To
avoid unlocking the door inadvertently,
make sure you only touch the lock sensor
and not other areas of the door handle.
After locking the doors with the lock
sensor, there is a brief delay before you can
unlock your vehicle. This delay lets you pull
the handle to make sure it locked.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean
to avoid issues with operation.
At the Electronic Tailgate
E187693
Press the exterior tailgate release button
inside of the tailgate handle. The tailgate
will unlock and open. See Electronic
Tailgate (page 67).
Smart Unlock (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
If you leave your key in the ignition, when
you open the driver door and lock your
vehicle with the power door lock control,
the doors lock then unlock.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
• Using the manual lock on the inside of
the door.
• Locking the driver door with a key.
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Using the lock button on the remote
control.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
63
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Locks
When you lock your vehicle using the
power door lock control (with the door
open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your
vehicle will search for an intelligent access
key in the passenger compartment after
you close the door. If your vehicle finds a
key, all of the doors will immediately
unlock.
In order to override the smart unlock
feature and intentionally lock the
intelligent access key inside your vehicle,
you can lock your vehicle after all doors
are closed by using the keyless entry
keypad, pressing the lock button on
another intelligent access key or touching
the locking area on the handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if
the ignition is on.
Autolock and Autounlock (If Equipped)
The autolock feature locks all the doors
when your doors are closed, the ignition is
on, and your vehicle reaches a speed
greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
When your doors autolock while driving,
stopping the vehicle then switching the
ignition off or to accessory and opening
the driver door unlocks all your doors. This
autounlock feature remains active for 10
minutes after stopping.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
have electronically locked them before
opening the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling
You can enable or disable these features
independently of each other using the
information display. An authorized dealer
can also help you enable or disable these
features. See General Information (page
108).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote entry system.
The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• After 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp does not turn on if the
control is set to the off position.
The lights do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the dimmer
control.
• Any door is open.
Battery Saver
The battery saver turns off the interior
lamps 30 minutes after you switch off the
ignition if a door is open and the dome
lamp switch is on. It turns off the interior
lamps after 10 minutes if the dome lamp
switch is off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition on after leaving
your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after
you close all of the doors.
KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window. It is invisible until touched and
then it illuminates so you can see and
touch the appropriate buttons.
64
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Locks
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E190936
You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is located on the owner’ s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own five-digit personal entry
codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code one.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code two.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code three.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code four.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code five.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
• Entry code one will recall driver 1
memory positions.
• Entry code two will recall driver 2
memory positions.
• Entry code three will recall driver 3
memory positions.
Note: Personal entry codes four and five
will not recall memory positions
65
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Locks
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking feature. See General
Information (page 108).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
66
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Locks
TAILGATE LOCK (If Equipped)
The tailgate lock can help prevent tailgate
theft.
Manual Tailgate Lock
E163087
Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock.
Turn it clockwise to lock the tailgate. Turn
it counterclockwise to unlock the tailgate.
Remote Control Tailgate Lock (If
Equipped)
Use the lock and unlock buttons on your
remote control to lock and unlock the
tailgate.
MANUAL TAILGATE (If Equipped)
E187692
1. Unlock the tailgate.
2. Pull up on the manual tailgate handle
to release the tailgate.
ELECTRONIC TAILGATE (If
Equipped)
WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a safety belt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
The electronic tailgate release will not
operate when:
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
With the Remote Control
E191530
Press the remote control button
twice within three seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access transmitter is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the
tailgate will unlock when you press the
tailgate release button.
67
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Tailgate
E187693
2. Press the button in the top of the
tailgate handle.
3. Push the tailgate up to close the
tailgate.
Note: The electronic tailgate is not a
powered tailgate. The use of a tonneau
cover or other aftermarket accessories,
freezing conditions or being parked downhill
may stop your tailgate from opening
automatically after it is unlatched. You may
need to pull the handle to open the tailgate
if the tailgate does not automatically lower
after being unlatched.
REMOVING THE TAILGATE
WARNING
Always properly secure cargo to
prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling
from vehicle, which could result in
compromised vehicle stability and serious
personal injury to vehicle occupants or
others.
You can remove the tailgate for more
loading room.
Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle does
not have a rearview camera.
E189556
1. Locate and disconnect the rearview
camera in-line connector. It is under
the pickup box on the right-hand side
of the vehicle near the spare tire.
2. There is a protective cap in the glove
box. Install it on the in-line connector
that remains under the pickup box.
3. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully
feed the tailgate harness up through
the gap between the pickup box and
the bumper and place it out of the way
under the pickup box.
4. Lower the tailgate.
E163092
5. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
7. Lift the tailgate to 45° from horizontal.
68
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Tailgate
8. Lift the right side off its hinge.
9. Lift the tailgate to 80° from horizontal.
10. Remove the tailgate from the left side
hinge by sliding it to the right.
Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate.
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
Use the step to make entering the truck
bed easier.
To reduce the risk of falling:
• Only operate the step when your
vehicle is on a level surface.
• Only operate the step in areas with
sufficient lighting.
• Always open the step panel to widen
the step.
• Always use the grab handle when
climbing on the step.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
• Make sure the step is clean before use.
• Keep the step load, you plus the load,
below 350 lb (159 kg).
Opening the Step
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the
step before moving your vehicle. Never drive
with the step or grab handle open.
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Push the button in the center of the
step molding. The step will pop out
slightly.
E187718
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step
to its lowest position.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward
out of the tailgate.
5. Rotate the handle up from horizontal
to vertical until you hear a click. You
have locked the handle in place.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
handle molding if it appears worn or
damaged.
Closing the Step
1. Press handle button 1 to lower the
telescoping handle extension, and then
press button 2 to release the handle.
Rotate the handle down from vertical
to horizontal.
69
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Tailgate
2. Push the handle back into the tailgate.
3. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate until
the step is secure.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)
Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the
tailgate when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.
Tailgate Mode
E163095
1. Pull the locking pin toward the center
of your vehicle.
E163096
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
E163097
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
E163098
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both
knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
secure the panels.
70
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Tailgate
E163099
5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into
the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage
both sides of the locking pins into their
holes in the pick-up box.
Reverse the steps to store the bed
extender.
Grocery Mode
E163100
Follow Steps 1-4 of the Tailgate Mode
instructions by rotating the panels away
from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
71
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Tailgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock™
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent the engine from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, the system has
malfunctioned. A message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the system.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle may have two integrated
keyhead transmitters.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key. It
operates all the locks, starts the vehicle
and acts as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys are lost
or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. You need
to erase the key codes from your vehicle
and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. Contact an authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of
eight coded keys to your vehicle. All eight
can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure programs both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
spare key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
72
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Security
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds
until you hear the door locks cycle.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
The key starts the engine if programming
is successful. You can operate the remote
entry system if the new key is an integrated
keyhead transmitter.
If programming was not successful, wait
20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle.
Note: If your programmed transmitters are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. You need to
erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys. Store an extra
programmed key away from your vehicle in
a safe place to help prevent any
inconvenience. Contact an authorized dealer
to purchase additional spare or replacement
keys.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access keys readily accessible.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
spare key programmed if two previously
programmed keys are not available.
Make sure that your vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure. Make sure that
you close all the doors before beginning
and that they remain closed throughout
the procedure. Perform all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop
and wait for at least one minute before
starting again if you perform any steps out
of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
Type One
E187576
73
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Security
Type Two
E187577
1. Place the first programmed key in the
backup slot (A) in the center console,
then press the push button ignition
switch. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Remove the intelligent access key.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot. Press the push button
ignition switch. After three seconds but
within 10 seconds of switching the
ignition off, insert the second previously
coded key into the ignition.
5. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. Place the unprogrammed intelligent
access key in the backup slot and press
the push button ignition switch. After
three seconds but within 10 seconds
of switching the ignition off and
removing the previously programmed
coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
Programming is now complete. Verify the
remote control functions operate and your
vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)
The active anti-theft system is designed
to warn you in the event of unauthorized
vehicle entry and is also designed to help
prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.
You can choose what is monitored by
arming the system in different ways. See
Information Displays (page 108).
The direction indicators flash and the horn
sounds if the system triggers while the
alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Reduced Guard (If Equipped)
To monitor the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
• Tailgate.
Lock your vehicle using the key in the driver
door lock cylinder.
74
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Security
Full Guard (If Equipped)
To monitor the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
• Tailgate.
• Movement inside your vehicle.
• Change in vehicle inclination, for
example, unwanted towing.
Lock your vehicle using the remote control
or the power door lock control with the
accompanying door open and then close
all doors.
Note: Do not choose full monitor mode if
movement within the vehicle is likely to
occur or when the vehicle is in transport.
Note: For correct operation of the interior
motion detection system, make sure all
windows are closed prior to arming the
system. This helps prevent accidental alarm
activation due to external influences and
make sure of correct interior motion
detection. Additionally, the interior motion
sensing system will not arm if any door is
ajar.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle
to arm the alarm.
The direction indicators flash once after
you lock your vehicle. This indicates the
alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully
arms after 20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
• Unlock the doors with the remote
control or keyless entry keypad.
• Switch the ignition on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door lock
cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then
switch the ignition on within 12
seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control stops the horn and direction
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
75
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Security
USING POWER RUNNING
BOARDS
WARNINGS
In extreme climates, excessive ice
buildup may occur, causing the
running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running
boards will resume normal function once
the blockage is cleared.
Turn off the running boards before
jacking or placing any object under
your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate
more slowly in cool temperatures.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Automatic Power Deploy
E166682
The running boards automatically extend
down and out when you open the door.
This can help you enter and exit your
vehicle.
Automatic Power Stow
When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after
a two-second delay.
Manual Power Deploy
You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display. See
General Information (page 108).
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display. See General Information (page
108).
76
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
• When disabled (OFF), the running
boards move to the stowed position
regardless of the door position.
• When enabled (AUTO), the running
boards move back to the correct
positions based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.
77
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 147).
E180482
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E180534
3. Lock the steering column.
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 147).
78
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Steering Wheel
E180535
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• tilt: press the top or bottom of the
control
• telescope: press the front or rear of the
control.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 152).
Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation. The
column responds to the adjustment
control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves to the full up and in
position when you switch the ignition off.
It returns to the previous setting when you
switch the ignition on. You can enable or
disable this feature in the information
display.
AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
E191327
Volume up.A
Media.B
Seek up or next.C
Volume down.D
Seek down or previous.E
Media
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or previous track.
79
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E191328
Mute.A
Voice recognition.B
End call.C
Answer call.D
See SYNC™ (page 410).
CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped)
Type 1
E191329
Type 2
E191337
See Cruise Control (page 220).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E191336
See Information Displays (page 108).
80
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (If
Equipped)
Note: Never use the controls when your feet
are on the accelerator or brake pedals,
especially when the vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in park (P).
Depending on your vehicle and equipment
level, the shape and location of your
power-adjustable pedal control can vary.
• If your control is vertical, then it is to
the left of the steering column and on
the instrument panel.
• If your control is horizontal, then it is on
the left side of the steering column.
The Vertical Control
E176213
Farther.A.
Closer.B.
The Horizontal Control
A B
E162916
Farther.A.
Closer.B.
Both horizontal and vertical controls
operate the same way:
1. Press and hold A to move the pedals
away from you.
2. Press and hold B to move the pedals
closer to you.
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 152).
81
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Pedals
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E172816
Rotate the end of the control:
• Away from you to increase the wiper
speed.
• Toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
Speed dependent wipers (if
equipped)
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Make sure you switch off the wipers
before entering a car wash.
Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with
ice, snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
In these conditions, you can do the
following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers.
• Change the wiper speed to normal or
high-speed wipe as necessary.
• Switch the autowipers off.
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor,
located in the area around the interior
mirror. The rain sensor monitors the
amount of moisture on the windshield and
automatically turns on the wipers. It will
adjust the wiper speed by the amount of
moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield. You can switch this feature on
or off in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 108).
E172817
82
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor. With low
sensitivity, the wipers will operate when
the sensor detects a large amount of
moisture on the windshield. With high
sensitivity, the wipers will operate when
the sensor detects a small amount of
moisture on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean
because the rain sensor is very sensitive. If
the area around the interior mirror is dirty,
then the wipers may turn on, for example,
if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washer before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E172818
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will turn on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer
fluid. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 108).
83
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
Off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may
not activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a collision.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers activate.
84
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Lighting
If equipped, the following also activate
when the lighting control is in the
autolamps position and you switch them
on in the information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 108).
Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: You disable the manual dimmer
when you adjust the setting to Auto
Dimming in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 108).
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
becomes discharged, the illuminated
components will switch to the maximum
setting.
E161902
Press repeatedly or press and hold until
you reach the desired level.
85
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure
the headlamps are switched to auto or on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display controls.
See Information Displays (page 108).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays
(page 108).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily
override autolamp control.
When switched off in the information
display, the daytime running lamps are off
in all lighting control switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system automatically turns on the high
beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the
tail lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system turns off the high
beams before they distract other drivers.
The low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic high
beam is not functioning properly, check the
windshield in front of the camera for a
blockage. A clear view of the road is required
for proper system operation. Make sure that
authorized personnel repair any windshield
damage in the area of the camera's field of
view.
Note: If the system detects a blockage such
as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,
and you do not observe changes, the system
may go into low beam mode until you clear
the blockage. A message may also appear
in the information display noting the front
camera is blocked.
86
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Lighting
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water
spots do not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam control. However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
may notice a decrease in the availability of
the automatic high beam control, especially
at start up. If you want to change the beam
state independently of the system, you may
switch the high beams on or off using the
lighting control switch. Automatic high
beam control resumes when conditions are
correct.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to decide
when to switch the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
switch on if:
• The outside light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
32 mph (52 km/h).
The high beams switch off if:
• The system detects the headlamps of
an approaching vehicle or the rear
lamps vehicle in front of you.
• Vehicle speed falls below 27 mph
(44 km/h).
• The outside light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.
Activating the System
Switch on automatic high beam control
using the information display and
autolamps. See Information Displays
(page 108).
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
Manually Overriding the System
When automatic high beam control has
activated the high beams, pushing or
pulling the stalk provides a temporary
override to low beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or
switch the lighting control from autolamps
to headlamps.
87
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Lighting
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)
E142453
Press the control to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
Off and the high beams are not on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
The direction indicator lever does not
mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated. The
direction indicator activation and
cancellation is electronic.
• To operate the left direction indicator,
push the lever down until it stops and
releases.
• To operate the right direction indicator,
push the lever up until it stops and
releases.
• To cancel direction indicator operation
manually, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times and stop.
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and hold. The direction
indicators flash for as long as you hold
the lever in this position.
SPOT LAMPS (If Equipped)
The spot lamps are positioned on the
forward-facing side of the exterior mirrors.
When the parking lamps are on due to the
lighting control switch being in the parking
lamps, headlamps, or autolamps position,
press the buttons located above the
lighting control switch to activate the
left-hand or right-hand side spot lamps.
E176842
88
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Lighting
Once switched on, the spot lamps light the
area in front of and to the side of your
vehicle.
Adjust the aim of the spot lamps by
moving the position of the exterior mirrors.
For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aim
of the lamps by folding the exterior mirror
into or away from the windows. For
power-folding mirrors, use the switch
located on the driver-side door. See
Exterior Mirrors (page 93).
Note: The spot lamps turn off
automatically when you reach a speed of
6 mph (10 km/h).
Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps
The cargo lamps are positioned in the
central high mounted stop lamp and to
either side of the cargo box.
The trailer hookup lamp is positioned on
the tailgate next to the handle.
E189587
To switch on the lamps, press
the button located in the lighting
control panel, or the button
located in the cargo box near the lamp.
E190880
When switched on, these lamps light the
cargo area of your vehicle and the trailer
hitch.
Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn off automatically when you reach a
speed of 3 mph (5 km/h). They also turn off
automatically after 10 minutes, fading
gradually to off.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The following lamps switch on when:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
Front Interior Lamps
Note: The front interior lamp switches are
on the overhead console. The exact location
of each switch on the overhead console
depends upon which roof, sunroof, and
window shade features are equipped on the
vehicle.
89
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Lighting
Note: Touch the required switch to switch
the door function off when you open any
door. When the door function is off and you
open a door, the courtesy and door lamps
will stay off. Touch the switch again to
switch the door function back on. When the
door function is on and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps will switch on.
Type 1
E176210
Left-hand side map lamp switch.A.
All lamps on switch.B.
Door function switch.C.
Right-hand side map lamp
switch.
D.
Type 2
E192153
D D
CA
B
All lamps on switch.A.
Door function switch.B.
All lamps off switch.C.
Map lamp switches.D.
E187342
All lamps on switch.A.
Door function switch.B.
90
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Lighting
Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped)
E187343
You can switch the lamps on or off by
pressing the button.
E182517
Left-hand side map lamp switch.A.
Right-hand side map lamp
switch.
B.
E187345
You can switch the lamps on or off by
pressing the button.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
91
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E176215
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped)
Press or lift the switch fully and release it.
Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Note: The window may disable for up to
five minutes if you cycle it up and down
repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to
the motor. Normal operation will resume
once the motor cools.
Restoring the One-Touch Up Function
You may lose the one-touch function if the
vehicle battery is low.
To reset the function after the battery
recharges:
1. Pull the switch all the way up.
2. Hold the switch until the glass stops
and continue to hold for two seconds.
3. Press the switch down and operate the
window to the full down position.
One-touch up will now be functional.
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration
with the door closed. Calibrating with the
door open will cause the window to
continuously bounce back.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
The window will stop if you release the
switch before the window closes fully.
92
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock (If Equipped)
E176216
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
93
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)
E163061
This feature lets you extend the mirror
about 3 inches (75 millimeters). It is useful
when towing a trailer. You can manually
pull out or push in the mirrors to the desired
position.
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
E176218
To fold both mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Press the control.
2. Press control again to unfold the
mirrors.
Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway
through their movement. Wait until the
mirrors stop moving and press the control
again.
The left-hand and right-hand mirrors move
at different rates. For example, one mirror
may stop while the other one continues to
move. This is normal.
Moving the mirrors 10 or more times within
one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time the mirrors
are manually folded.
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping
Mirrors (If Equipped)
This feature lets you position both mirrors
at the same time.
94
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E176218
To adjust your mirrors, make sure you
switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in
accessory mode or the engine running) and
then:
1. Press and release the control. It lights.
2. Press the adjustment control to
position the mirrors.
• Press the left arrow to extend the
mirrors out. Press the right arrow to
retract the mirrors in.
• Press the up or down arrow to fold
the mirrors toward the window
glass. Press the up or down arrow
again to fold the mirrors out.
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
145).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 152).
Auto-dimming Feature (if
equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming
mirror turns on.
Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
While the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
The lower, outer part of the mirror housings
light when you switch the headlamps or
parking lamps on.
Spot Lamps (If Equipped)
The area lights are on the forward-facing
portion of the mirror housing. You can
switch them on and off by using the
controls located on the instrument panel.
See Lighting (page 84).
360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)
Each mirror includes a camera.
95
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle. The blind spot mirror
is only on the driver exterior mirror.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 232).
96
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SLIDING WINDOWS (If Equipped)
Power Sliding Back Window (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
When operating the power sliding
back window, you must make sure
all rear seat occupants and cargo are
not in the proximity of the back window.
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.
E176217
The control is on the overhead console.
Press and hold the control to open the
window. Pull and hold the control to close
the window.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
97
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E191272
Moonroof open. Press and
release to open the moonroof.
The moonroof stops short of the
fully opened position. Press and
release the control again to open
the moonroof fully.
A
Moonroof vent. Press and
release to vent the moonroof.
B
Sunshade open. Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens
automatically with the
moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
C
closed. Note: The sunshade
stops short of its fully opened
position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the
sunshade fully, press the control
again.
Sunshade close. Press and
release to close the sunshade.
D
Moonroof close. Press and
release to close the moonroof
from either the open or vent
positions.
E
98
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses
some distance if an obstacle is detected
while closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two
seconds after the roof comes to a stop
following a bounce-back reversal.
99
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
E176090
Engine oil pressure gaugeA
Engine coolant temperature gaugeB
Fuel gaugeC
Transmission fluid temperature gaugeD
SpeedometerE
Information display See General Information (page 108).F
TachometerG
100
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Type 3
E176091
Engine oil pressure gaugeA
Engine coolant temperature gaugeB
Fuel gaugeC
Transmission fluid temperature or Turbo boost (Ecoboost engine only) gaugeD
SpeedometerE
Information display See General Information (page 108).F
TachometerG
101
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle
should stay in the normal operating range
(between L and H). If the needle falls
below the normal range, stop your vehicle,
turn off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is
correct, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.
The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
• It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station.
This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
• The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
• If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
gauge needle is at 1/16th or about 35 miles
(56km) to empty, whichever occurs first.
Variations:
Note: The low fuel warning and distance-to-empty warning can appear at different fuel
gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal.
Distance-to-emptyFuel gauge positionDriving type (fuel economy
conditions)
35 miles to 80 miles (56 km
to 129 km)
1/16thHighway driving
10 miles to 35 miles (16 km
to 56 km)
1/16th-1/4Severe duty driving (trailer
towing, extended idle)
102
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge
Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds
the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible and verify the airflow is
not restricted such as snow or debris
blocking airflow through the grill. Also,
higher than normal operating temperature
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or
off-road use). Refer to Special operating
conditions in the scheduled maintenance
information for instructions. Operating the
transmission for extended periods with the
gauge in the higher than normal area may
cause internal transmission damage. You
need to alter the severity of your driving
conditions to lower the transmission
temperature into the normal range. If the
gauge continues to show high
temperatures, see an authorized dealer.
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Compass
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 108).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 108).
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your
vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 221).
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have normal braking (without Anti-lock
braking system) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Automatic High Beam (If Equipped)
Illuminates when this feature is
on. See Automatic High Beam
Control (page 86).
Auto Start-stop (If Equipped)
It will illuminate to inform you
when the engine shuts down or
in conjunction with a message.
103
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 232).
Brake System
E144522
It will illuminate when you
engage the parking brake with
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that you do not have the parking brake
engaged. If you do not have the parking
brake engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction.
Have the system checked immediately by
an authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Check 4X4 (If Equipped)
Illuminates with the message
CHECK 4X4 when a four-wheel
drive fault is present. See Using
Four-Wheel Drive (page 188).
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
Illuminates gray or green when
you switch this feature on. See
Using Cruise Control (page
220).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for
a burned out bulb.
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electronic Locking Differential
E163170
Illuminates when using the
electronic locking differential.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It will illuminate or flash when
the electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 199).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 313).
104
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 312).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If
Equipped)
Note: Some indicators will appear different
depending on vehicle options.
E163173
E181778
Illuminates momentarily when you select
two-wheel drive high.
E181781
Illuminates when the automatic
four-wheel drive system is engaged.
E181780
Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is
engaged.
E181779
Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is
engaged.
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
High Beam
Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It will
flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
E163171
Illuminates when hill descent is
switched on.
Low Fuel Level
Illuminates when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
Illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
105
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
It will also illuminate momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate
when you switch the ignition on, or begins
to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control
Illuminates when the system has
detected a powertrain or an
all-wheel drive fault. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after you start the engine, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
of your vehicle emissions control system.
Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in
the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control System
(page 179).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
When you first switch the ignition on,
before engine start, the service engine soon
indicator light illuminates to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for inspection maintenance testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until you crank the engine, and then
turn itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
it means that your vehicle is not ready for
inspection maintenance testing. See
Emission Control System (page 179).
Sport Mode
E176099
Illuminates when you switch the
sport mode on.
Traction and Stability Control
E138639
Illuminates when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 205).
Traction and Stability Control Off
Illuminates when you switch the
system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on
or when you switch the ignition off. See
Using Stability Control (page 205).
106
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
E161509
Illuminates when the tow/haul
feature has been activated. If the
light flashes steadily, have the
system serviced immediately, damage to
the transmission could occur. See
Automatic Transmission (page 182).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Airbag Secondary Warning
Sounds if there is a malfunction with the
safety belt warning lamp and there is a
fault in the supplemental restraints
system.
Beltminder Warning
Sounds when a safety belt is unfastened
in an occupied seat and your vehicle is
moving.
Door Ajar Warning
Sounds when any door is not completely
closed and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h).
Headlamps On Warning
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Key in Ignition Warning
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.
Rear Park Aid Warning
A detection warning sounds when
obstacles are within a certain range of the
bumper area. The system turns on
automatically whenever you switch the
ignition on.
Parking Brake On Warning
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
Service Advancetrac Warning
Sounds when there is a malfunction with
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) or
Rollover Stability Control (RSC) system.
107
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.
Information Display Controls
(Type 1 and 2)
E176092
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
Main menu (Type 1)
• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel economy
• Driver assist
• Settings
108
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip 1 & 2
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip options.
Trip 1 & 2
Digital Speed - Press OK for km/h
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
DTE
Average Fuel
• Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Trip Odometer - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
• Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
Fuel Economy
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display.
109
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Auto StartStop status
• Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running
out of fuel.
• Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
• Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time. Press and hold
OK to reset this value.
• Auto StartStop status - Shows the current status of the auto startstop system.
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different driver setting choices.
Driver Assist
Engine Hours XXXXXXEngine HoursDriver Assist
Engine Idle Hours XXXXXX
Vehicle graphic with tire pres-
sures
Tire Pressure
Rear Park Aid
Select Your SettingBrake Type
Trailer Sway
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
110
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure
Displays your current vehicle tire pres-
sures.
E185360
Settings
Settings
Select Your SettingDTE CalculateVehicle
Select Your SettingAutolamp DelayLighting
Daytime Light
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
Select Your SettingRemote Unlock
Remaining Life XX% - Hold OK to resetOil Life Reset
Select Your SettingClimate ControlRemote Start
Duration
System
Courtesy WipeWiper
Controls
Admin Keys and MyKeysMyKey StatusMyKey
MyKey Mileage
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Select Your Setting911 Assist
Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
111
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Vol. Limiter
Clear MyKeys - Press OK to clear MyKeysClear MyKeys
Select Your SettingUnitsDisplay Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
Main menu (Type 2)
• Display Mode
• Trip/Fuel
• Towing
• Off Road
• Settings
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Display Mode
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Display Mode
DTE
Transmission Temp.
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer - Press OK for km/h
Engine Information - Oil Life, Engine Hours, Engine Idle Hours - Hold OK to Reset
MyKey Status - Admin Keys and MyKey Mileage
• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
• Transmission Temp - Shows the trans temp value.
• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure psi.
• Engine Information - Shows engine information.
• MyKey Status - Shows the status of your MyKeys.
112
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure
Displays your current vehicle tire pres-
sures.
E184771
Trip/Fuel
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip and fuel options.
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1 or 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Select Your SettingCompass
Auto StartStop status
Trip 1 or 2
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
• Mi - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
• Auto StartStop status - Shows the current status of the auto startstop system.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.
Towing
Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different towing setting choices.
113
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Note: Trailer options are not available if your vehicle speed is greater than 3mph (5km/h).
Towing
Trailer connection statusTrailer Status
active trailer name or Default Trailer
accumulated trailer miles
Trailer brake gain
Output
Trailer Sway ControlTrailer
Options
no active trailerSelect Trailer
Programmed trailers
Default Trailer
List of named
trailers, No Stored
Trailers - Press OK
to rename
Rename TrailerChange Trailer Settings
List of named or
default trailers -
Press OK to select
Reset Trailer
Distance
Name of stored Pro
Trailer Backup
Assist trailer
Change Pro Trailer
Sticker
No stored Pro
Backup trailers -
Press OK to select
Name of stored
conventional trailer
Add Pro Trailer
Backup
No stored conven-
tional trailer - Press
OK to select
Select Your SettingChange Brake Type
Change Brake Effort
114
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Towing
List of named
trailers, No stored
trailers - Press OK to
select
Delete Trailer
List of named
trailers or default
trailers - Press OK to
Select
Change Trailer
Setup
New Trailer - Press OK to selectAdd Trailer
Select Your SettingTrailer Brake Type
Trailer Brake Effort
Select Your SettingChange Trailer
Setup
Pro Trailer Backup
Assist only Supports
Trailers with
Conventional
Hitches. Press OK to
Exit
ConventionalConnection
Checklist
Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Off Road
Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different off road choices.
Off Road
Pitch, steering angle and roll
Power Distribution
115
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Settings
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Rear Park Aid
Select Your SettingDTE Calcula-
tion
Easy Entry/Exit
Select Your SettingAutolamp
Delay
Lighting
Daytime Lights
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
Select Your SettingRemote
Unlock
Vehicle
Climate
Control
Remote Start
Seats
Duration
System
Courtesy WipeWiper
Controls
Advanced
Settings
Rain Sensing
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
Select Your Setting911 Assist
Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
116
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Hold OK to Clear MyKeysClear MyKeys
Select Your SettingUnitsDisplay
Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
Information Display Controls
(Type 3) (If Equipped)
E176093
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
Main menu
You can access the menus using the
information display control.
E176094
My View
E176095
Trip/Fuel
E163181
Truck Info
E176096
Towing
E176097
Off Road
E176098
Settings
My View
E176094
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following My View
options.
117
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
MyView
Trip 1Trip/Fuel ScreensAdd/Remove
Screens
Configure MyView
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Navigation/Compass
Auto StartStop
Gauge ViewTruck Info Screens
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
MyKey Status
Trailer StatusTowing Screens
Trailer Information
Trailer Light Check
Off Road StatusOff Road Screens
Power Distribution
Up/Down moves selec-
tion in the list
Screen Selection 1
- 7
Reorder Screens
Press OK to select
Trip/Fuel
E176095
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following trip and
fuel options.
118
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1 or 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Navigation
Select Your SettingCompass
Auto StartStop status
Trip 1 or 2
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
• Mi - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
• Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in
Navigation is not set).
• Auto StartStop status - Shows the current status of the auto startstop system.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.
Truck Info
E163181
In this mode, off-road
information depicted with
graphics are available.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Truck Info
Gauge View
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer - Press OK for km/h
119
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Truck Info
Engine Information - Oil Life, Engine Hours, Engine Idle Hours - Hold OK to Reset
MyKey Status - Admin Keys, MyKeys and MyKey Mileage
• Gauge View - Shows the turbo boost or transmission temp value.
• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure psi.
• Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Engine Information - Shows engine information.
• MyKey Status - Shows the status of your MyKeys.
Tire Pressure
Displays your current vehicle tire pres-
sures.
E184771
Towing
E176096
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following towing
options.
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Note: Trailer options are not available if your vehicle speed is greater than 3mph (5km/h).
120
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Towing
% Grade, steering angle, gain and output displayTowing
Status
Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles, Pro Trailer Backup Assist Status - Press
OK for Trailer Options
Towing
Informa-
tion
Running, Brake/Turn Signal Light Status or No Trailer DetectedTrailer
Light
Status
Trailer Sway ControlTrailer
Setup
no active trailerSelect trailer
Programmed trailers
Default Trailer
List of named
trailers, No Stored
Trailers - Press OK
to rename
Rename TrailerChange Trailer Settings
List of named or
default trailers -
Press OK to select
Reset Trailer
Distance
Name of stored Pro
Trailer Backup
Assist trailer name
Change Pro Trailer
Sticker
No stored Pro
Backup trailers -
Press OK to select
Name of stored
conventional trailer
Add Pro Trailer
Backup
No stored conven-
tional trailer - Press
OK to select
Select Your SettingChange Brake Type
Change Brake Effort
121
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Towing
List of named
trailers, No stored
trailers - Press OK
to select
Delete Trailer
Conventional, Fifth
Wheel or Goose-
neck
Change Trailer
Setup
New Trailer - Press OK to selectAdd Trailer
Select Your SettingTrailer Brake Type
Trailer Brake Effort
Select Your SettingTrailer Setup
Pro Trailer Backup
Assist only Supports
Trailers with
Conventional
Hitches. Press OK to
Exit
ConventionalConnec-
tion Check-
list
Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
Off Road
E176097
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following off road
options.
Off Road
Pitch, steering angle, roll, Elocker and 4X4
Power Distribution
Settings
E176098
Use the arrow buttons to
configure different driver setting
choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
122
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Auto Highbeam
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alert
Rear Park Aid
Select Your SettingAlert Sensit-
ivity
Collision
Warn
Warn
Select Your SettingCruise
Control
Select Your SettingModeLane
Keeping
System
Alert Intensity
Select Your SettingDTE Calcula-
tion
Auto Engine OffVehicle
Easy Entry/Exit
Select Your
Setting
Autolamp DelayLighting
Daytime Lights
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
Select Your
Setting
Remote Unlock
Select Your SettingAlarm
Ask on Exit
Select Your SettingPower Running
Boards
Select Your
Setting
Climate ControlRemote Start
123
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Seats and Wheel or
Seats
DurationAdvanced
Settings
System
Courtesy WipeWiper Controls
Rain Sensing
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
Select Your Setting911 Assist
Do Not Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
Hold OK to Clear MyKeysClear MyKeys
Select Your SettingUnitsDisplay Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
E184451
124
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. The information
display will automatically remove other
messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Active Park Fault
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
221).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-
tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
221).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
221).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
The system has disabled the automatic braking.Normal Cruise Active
Automatic Braking
Turned Off
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Front Sensor Not Aligned
The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down
125
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac Off
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac On
The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
it on.
AdvanceTrac SPORT
MODE
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 203).
Traction Control Off
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 203).
Traction Control On
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm and Security
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 74).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
126
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low-
voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-
tion System (page 232).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 232).
Cross Traffic Vehicle
Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 232).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
127
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning
Malfunction
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Collision Warning System (page
238).
Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door(s) listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The tailgate is not completed closed.Tailgate Ajar
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
128
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Drivetrain
ActionMessage
The electronic locking differential (ELD) is enabled or
disabled.
Locking Differential
Engaged/Disengaged
The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed
requirement to engage.
To Engage Locking
Differential Slow to XX
mph/km/h
The electronic locking differential request the accelerator to
be released in order to engage.
To Engage Locking
Differential Release
Accelerator Pedal
An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is
present. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 188).
Check Locking Differen-
tial
The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission in
Neutral
The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled
Engine
ActionMessage
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
engine temperature.
Power Reduced to Lower Engine
Temp
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
129
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.To START Press Brake
The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 166).
No Key Detected
You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine
and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Successful
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Key Program Failure
You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough Keys
Learned
The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine
is on.
Engine ON
130
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires you to
clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil
Check (page 312).
Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 312).Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system
immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 318).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. See an author-
ized dealer.
Transport / Factory
Mode
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
131
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
Off Road
ActionMessage
Hill descent control mode is active.Hill Descent Control Active
Hill descent control mode is inactive.Hill Descent Control OFF
Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
entry has not been met.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
XX MPH/km/h or Less
You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
For Hill Descent Select Gear
132
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
resume control.
Hill Descent Driver Resume
Control
A hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control Fault
The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.Hill Descent Control Off System
Cooling
The hill descent control system is ready.Hill Descent Control Ready
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Parking Aid (page 209).
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Parking Aid (page 209).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake
and Switch
The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric park brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric park brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
133
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric park brake system has been put into a special
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Maintenance
Mode
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
The steering lock system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Lock Malfunc-
tion Service Now
Pro Trailer Backup Assist
ActionMessage
Pro Trailer Backup Assist can only be activated when
the vehicle is stopped.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Not
Active Stop Vehicle to Activate
Camera System is locating the sticker. Wait until the
sticker is found before attempting to use Pro Trailer
Backup Assist.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Locating Sticker Please wait...
Press Knob to Exit
Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist has reached max
trailer angle.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop
now Maximum trailer angle
Press Knob to Exit
Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist is no longer
controlling steering.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop
Now Take Control of Steering
Wheel
134
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Slow vehicle speed. Vehicle is approaching the exit
speed for the Pro Trailer Backup Assist feature.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Reduce Speed Turn Knob to
Steer Press Knob to Exit
Conditions for Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation are
not met. See Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ (page 253).
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
System is Not Available
Pro Trailer Backup Assist cannot operate with hands
on wheel. Remove hands to activate.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Remove Hands from Steering
Wheel to Activate Press Knob
to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist knob has been pushed to
deactivate the system.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Cancelled by Driver Take
Control of Steering Wheel
Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation is only available in
reverse gear. Shift gear selector into reverse to activate.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Shift
to Reverse to Activate. Press
Knob to Exit
Camera system cannot locate sticker. Shift to park.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Sticker Not Found Shift to Park
Press Knob to Exit
Camera system cannot locate sticker. See Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ (page 253).
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Sticker Not Found Refer to
Owner's Manual. Press Knob to
Exit
Drive between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h) straight
forward to calibrate Pro Trailer Backup Assist.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Drive Straight Forward to Calib-
rate. Press Knob to Exit
The system has completed calibration. Stop the
vehicle to use Pro Trailer Backup Assist feature.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Calibration Complete Stop
Vehicle
Remote Start
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button
135
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Seats
ActionMessage
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not
Permitted While Driving
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory {0} Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .To START Press Brake
The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Cranking Time Exceeded
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 356).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 356).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 356). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
136
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Trailer
ActionMessage
The current gain setting for the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0}
The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a
trailer is not connected.
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0} No Trailer
Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a
Trailer (page 252).
Trailer Brake Module Fault
A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.
Trailer Connected
A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 252).
Trailer Wiring Fault
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
a Trailer (page 252).
Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Towing a Trailer (page 252).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault
See Manual
4WD
ActionMessage
A 4X4 system fault is present.Check 4x4
The 4X4 system is making a shift.4x4 Shift in Progress
When your vehicle is at a stop and you need to shift
into Neutral before you select 4X4 LOW.
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N
137
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
When your vehicle is moving and you need to reduce
your speed to select 4X4 LOW.
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
You select 2WD while your vehicle is at a stop in 4X4
LOW and you need to shift into Neutral.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N
You select 2WD while your vehicle is operating in 4X4
LOW and you need to reduce your speed.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
May display when there is a Transfer case gear tooth
blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral
state.
Shift Delayed Pull Forward
The 4X4 system is temporarily disabled, and the overall
powertrain output response is reduced. The 4X4
system and powertrain response will be automatically
restored after the 4X4 system has had the opportunity
to cool down.
4x4 Temporarily Disabled
The 4X4 system has been restored to its original
setting.
4x4 Restored
The 4X4 system is temporarily locked for added drive-
line protection and has automatically switched to 4H
setting.
4x4 Temporarily Locked
138
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E217932
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
(page 154).
B
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
C
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
D
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
E
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in your vehicle.F
139
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
MAX Defrost: Adjust to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the
windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
G
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
MAX A/C: Adjust for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents and air conditioning automatically turns on.
H
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
I
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.
Air distribution control: Press to switch airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
J
Note: At least one of these buttons remain on while the system is on.
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 145).
K
140
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
E217905
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired
temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside
or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
A
MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the
windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear
the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also
automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
B
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
C
Air distribution control: Press to switch airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
D
141
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
E
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F
DUAL: Press to switch separate passenger side temperature control off and
on. When dual zone is off, passenger temperature settings remain the same as
the driver settings.
G
Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the
passenger side.
H
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
I
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.
Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
(page 154).
J
Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on
and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 155).
K
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.L
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 145).
M
Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side.N
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
WARNING
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up. If the
windows fog up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
142
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
airflow to the windshield and side window
vents. In addition, the fan may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
143
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the MAX A/C button.Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
1
Drive with the windows fully open until
you feel cold air through the air vents.
2
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Select the instrument panel air vents
using the air distribution buttons.
3
144
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the defrost button.Select the windshield air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Press the A/C button if the indicator is
off.
2
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
4
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS (If Equipped)
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear window
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time. Start the engine before you
switch the heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 453).
145
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle.
The climate control system works to
achieve comfort according to your previous
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back
on, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 108).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated seats do not
automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster
and heated mirrors automatically turn on.
146
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. An improperly
adjusted head restraint may not
adequately protect an occupant during an
impact from the rear.
147
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front Seat Head Restraint
E138642
Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints
E166700
E
D
C
B
A
Rear Seat Center Head Restraint
E166701
A
D
C
B
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Fold button (rear seat outboard
only).
E
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
148
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
Note: For rear seat outboard seats, you can
fold the head restraint forward for easier
removal.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint
Note: The rear seat outboard head
restraints may fold forward for improved
visibility.
1. Press and hold button E.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
Front Seat Center Head Restraint
Your vehicle may be equipped with a front
row center head restraint that you cannot
adjust or remove.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted
position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head
restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
restraint releases to the upright position.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING
Do not adjust the driver's seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
E175314
149
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
Recline Adjustment
E175315
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
E166702
The lumbar support control is located on
the outboard side of the seat. Turn the
control to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while the vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
150
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
E176038
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E176039
Multi-Contour Front Seats With
Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system will turn off
after 20 minutes.
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seatback and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
E156301
151
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
Lumbar and bolster modeMassage mode
Upper lumbarBack massage intensity
adjustment
A
Lumbar decreaseMassage intensity decrease
and off
*
B
Lower lumbar
**
Cushion massage intensity
adjustment
C
Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD
-On and offE
*
The massage feature will default to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature will default to the
middle lumbar mode.
**
Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function. To access and make
adjustments to the lumbar setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Lo or Hi.
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This function automatically recalls the
position of these features:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power steering column.
• Optional power adjustable pedals.
The memory control is on the driver door.
152
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors, power
adjustable pedals and power steering
column to your desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
Note: A confirmation that you saved a
memory preset appears in the information
display.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The seat, mirrors, pedals and
steering column move to the position
stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when you
place the transmission in park (P) or neutral
(N) if the ignition is on.
Note: Press any seat or mirror adjustment
switch (or any memory button) during a
memory recall to cancel the operation.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if you linked
it to a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Keyless
Entry (page 64).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off will
move the seat and steering column to the
Easy Entry position.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls
or intelligent access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
features to the position you desire.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in Step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to two inches
(five centimeters) when you switch the
ignition off. The driver seat returns to the
previous position when you switch the
ignition on.
153
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 108).
REAR SEATS
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion.
You can flip each seat cushion up into a
vertical storage position.
E181250
Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks
into the vertical storage position.
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position
WARNING
Make sure that cargo or any objects
are not trapped underneath the seat
cushion before returning the seat
cushion to its original position, and that the
seat cushion locks into place. Failure to do
so may prevent the seat from operating
properly in the event of a crash, which
could increase the risk of serious injury.
E166704
Pull the control on the bottom of the seat
cushion to release the seat cushion from
the storage position.
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
154
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in
the on position, press the heated seat
switch to enable heating mode. When
activated, they turn off automatically when
you switch off the engine.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
Heated Seats
155
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Touch the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats only function when the
engine is running.
E146309
To operate the cooled seats:
Touch the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and
off. More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the cooled seats are on, the feature turns
itself off. You need to reactivate it.
Climate controlled seat air filter
replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is
not needed.
156
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
FRONT SEAT ARMREST (If
Equipped)
E175382
Press the release control to move the front
seat armrest up or down.
E184821
Lift the latch to open the lid and gain
access to the optional storage
compartment under the center seat
cushion.
The cupholder is located inside the front
seat armrest. You can also flip the
cupholder so that it faces forward. See
Center Console (page 164).
REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)
E181222
Pull the strap located on the center
seatback to access the armrest and
cupholders.
The cupholders are located inside the rear
seat armrest. To open the cupholders:
1. Push in gently on the center of the
plastic panel on the front edge of the
armrest. The cupholders will partially
open.
2. Pull the cupholder fully open before
using.
157
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E188211
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This helps ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
158
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press
and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
159
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E188213
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
codes for all buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
160
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
161
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket (if equipped). Improper use
of the lighter can cause damage not
covered by your warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not
running, the battery can discharge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the outlet and blows the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can
cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the
power point. To prevent the battery from
being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the engine is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when the vehicle is parked
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the instrument panel.
• In the front of the center console.
• In the 20% seat bin.
• In the center console storage bin.
• On the rear of the center console.
110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC
Power Outlet
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power outlet when
the devices are not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power outlet, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Do not use a single
power outlet to power multiple devices. It
may cause the power outlet to exceed the
400 watt load limit and overload, resulting
in fire or serious injury.
E191617
162
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light, located on the
power outlet, is:
• On and the light is solid — the power
outlet is available or the plugged in
device is within the power range and
does not exceed the outlet's power
limits.
• Three flashes and off — the power
outlet is overloading.
• Off — the power outlet power supply
is off; ignition is not on.
• Constant flashing — the power outlet
is in fault mode, and requires you to
restart your vehicle.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
You can use the 400 watt power outlet for
these types of electric devices:
• Electric hand drills.
• Rechargeable power tools.
• Video games.
• Laptops.
• Television screens.
You should not use the 400 watt power
outlet for these types of electric devices:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, for example vacuum
cleaners, electric saws and other
electric power tools, or
compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices which process
precise data, for example medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply, for
example microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets or touch sensor
lamps.
Note: This feature works only when the
vehicle is running.
Note: This feature has a maximum output
of 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P).
Note: While in drive (D), the maximum
outlet output is 300 watts.
Note: When powering electric devices that
require more than 10 watts in vehicles
equipped with keyless start, the vehicle
must remain running. It does not allow you
to switch the ignition off or switch the
ignition to accessory mode.
163
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped)
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
In vehicles with a 40-20-40 split-bench
seat, the cup holders are inside of the
folding console.
E185121
To use the cup holders:
1. Lift the console lid up to open.
2. Lift the cup holders up and rotate them
outward.
3. Close the console.
Vehicles with a console-mounted shifter
feature cup holders molded into the
console.
E176222
A. Front cup holders.
B. Rear cup holders.
E176223
Available console features include:
A. 12 volt DC power point.
B. One of the following:
• USB ports and SD card slot.
• Audio input jack and USB port.
• Audio input jack.
C. 12-volt power point.
D. Locking storage compartment with
hanging file folder supports and room
for a laptop computer.
E. 110 volt AC power point.
F. 12 volt DC power point.
164
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Storage Compartments
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped)
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
165
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
C
D
B
A
E163165
A (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
C (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
D (start) - Cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
166
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Ignition Modes
E144447
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may
not start when the vehicle starts.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds (without the engine starting)
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the engine
for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you
are limited to a 15-second engine cranking
time. You need to wait 60 minutes before
you can crank the engine for 60 seconds
again.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
• Turn the ignition key to on. If your
vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, see the following instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal. If your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, fully press the clutch
pedal also.
2. Turn the key to start to start the engine.
Release the key when the engine starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
167
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in the vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of position P.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
• The key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, locate
the backup slot (A) in one of two positions:
Type One
E187576
Type Two
E187577
1. If your vehicle is equipped with Type
One, make sure to place the key
properly into the backup slot.
2. If your vehicle is equipped with Type
Two, make sure the buttons are facing
the rear of the vehicle and the key ring
up. Place the key into the backup slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, and then the button to
switch on the engine.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart the engine within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if a valid key is not
present.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without
the key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if
the system does not detect a valid key. If
you open and close a door while the engine
is running, the system searches for a valid
key. You cannot restart the engine if the
system does not detect a valid key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
168
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds.
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
the engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the engine has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic engine shutdown feature.
When you switch it off temporarily, it turns
on at the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the
30-second countdown has expired by
doing any of the following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on (for the current ignition cycle
only). Use the information display to
do so. See Information Displays
(page 108).
• During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press
OK or RESET (depending on your type
of information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
2. Turn the key to off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
2. Press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position N and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move
the transmission selector lever to
position P and turn the key to off.
169
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position N and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move
the transmission selector lever to
position P.
3. Press and hold the button for one
second, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in
(2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
170
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
171
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP (If Equipped)
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically shutting off and restarting
the engine while stopped. The engine will
restart automatically when you release the
brake pedal.
In some situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
• To maintain interior comfort.
• To recharge the battery.
Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine is off.
WARNINGS
The engine may restart
automatically if required by the
system.
Switch the ignition off before
opening the hood or performing any
maintenance. Failure to do so may
result in serious injuries due to automatic
engine restart.
Always switch the ignition off before
leaving your vehicle, as the system
may have turned the engine off, but
the ignition will still be on and automatic
restart may occur.
The Auto StartStop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
108).
Enabling Auto StartStop
The system automatically enables every
time you start your vehicle if:
• You do not press the Auto StartStop
button (not illuminated).
• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (4 km/h) after you have
initially started your vehicle.
• You have stopped your vehicle.
• Your foot is on the brake pedal.
• The transmission is in drive (D) or Sport
mode.
• The driver door is closed.
• There is adequate brake vacuum.
• The interior compartment has cooled
or warmed to an acceptable level.
• The front windshield defroster is off.
• You have not turned the steering wheel
rapidly or you do not have it at a sharp
angle.
• The vehicle is not on a steep road
grade.
• The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
• The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
• Elevation is below about 10000 feet
(3048 meters).
• Ambient temperature is moderate.
• You have selected 4X2 or Auto mode.
• The trailer is not connected.
• You have not selected Tow haul.
• You have not selected Manual mode.
Note: The system allows multiple
successive Auto StartStop events, but it
may not operate in conditions of heavy
traffic or in extended low speed operation.
The green Auto StartStop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey Auto
StartStop indicator light, it
illuminates when automatic engine stop
is not available due to one of the above
noted conditions not being met.
172
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have removed your foot from the
brake pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
• The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
• You have moved the transmission from
drive (D) to any gear except park (P).
• Your vehicle is moving.
• The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
• Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
• The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
• You have exceeded the maximum
engine off time.
• When you press the Auto StartStop
button with the engine automatically
stopped.
• The front defroster is turned to the Max
setting.
Any of the following conditions may result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have increased the blower fan
speed or changed the climate control
temperature.
• You have an electrical accessory
turned on or plugged in.
Note: You may notice that the climate seat
fan fluctuates during an automatic restart.
Disabling Auto StartStop
E181352
Press the Auto StartStop button located
on the center console to switch the system
off. The button will illuminate. This will only
deactivate the system for the current
ignition cycle. Press the button again to
restore Auto StartStop function.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber Auto
StartStop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. You must
restart the vehicle manually. See
Information Displays (page 108).
If your vehicle is in an engine off Auto
StartStop state and you change the
transmission to reverse (R) while the brake
pedal is not pressed, the message Auto
StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine will
appear. You must press the brake pedal
within 10 seconds or a shift to park (P) and
a manual restart will be required.
173
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if you misuse or
mishandle them.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity,
which can cause a fire if you pump
fuel into an ungrounded fuel container.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If swallowed, call a
physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
you splash fuel in your eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash your skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
“ Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.
If you splash fuel on your skin, promptly
wash your skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician
immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
174
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. We do not recommend fuels with
an octane rating below 87.
For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, to
provide improved performance, we
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles
E161513
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of
87, or regular unleaded gasoline blended
with a maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow fuel filler
cap or the fuel tank filler pipe will have a
yellow housing or bezel. Some fuel stations
offer fuels posted as regular unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating below 87,
particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels
with octane levels below 87 are not
recommended.
175
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel. This may have
an adverse effect on powertrain
components.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from
Off to On several times after refueling
to allow the fuel system to pump the
fuel from the fuel tank to the engine.
On restarting, cranking time will take a
few seconds longer than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gal (3.8 L) of fuel is
enough to restart the engine. If the
vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep
grade, more than 1 gal (3.8 L) may be
required.
• The service engine soon indicator may
come on. For more information on the
service engine soon indicator, See
Audible Warnings and Indicators
(page 107).
For information on calculating DTE
(Distance to empty), See Instrument
Cluster (page 100).
Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle.
• In SuperCab and SuperCrew vehicles,
the funnel is located under the second
row passenger side seat near the spare
tire toolbox.
• On regular cab vehicles, the funnel is
located behind the passenger seat.
176
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Locate the plastic funnel.
E142668
2. Insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the
portable fuel container.
4. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNINGS
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
and could lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
177
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
When fueling your vehicle:
1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
E156032
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle. Hold handle
higher during insertion for easier
access. Leave the fuel pump nozzle
fully inserted until you are done
pumping.
E154765
4. Remove the fuel filler nozzle and fully
close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank. The fill pipe is equipped with a drain
hole. Excess fuel due to overfill may drain
through the drain hole and drip onto the
ground.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,
a service engine warning lamp may appear
on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove
any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the
fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle
several times to allow the inlet to close
properly. This will dislodge any debris
preventing the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It
may take several driving cycles for the
message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after 4 or
more hours with the engine off) followed
by city or highway driving. Continuing to
drive with the message on may cause the
service engine soon lamp to turn on as
well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable
fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range.
178
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty.
• The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
• Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank
even when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is
your engine’s break-in period). A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,200 km) to 3,000 mi
(4,800 km). Also, fuel expense, frequency
of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not
accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Keeping records during
summer and winter will show how
temperature impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
fuel economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks may reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
179
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards. To make sure that the
catalytic converter and other emission
control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 453).
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of
components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be the
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company
parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
• the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly
180
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 177).
• driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness, and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, you may need to have
the vehicle serviced. See On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
may need to perform the following driving
cycle consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours without starting the engine. Then,
start the engine and complete the above
driving cycle. The engine must warm up to
its normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the engine until the
above driving cycle is complete. If the
vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you
will have to repeat the above driving cycle.
181
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and latch the gearshift in park (P).
Turn the ignition to the off position
and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.
Do not use the tow/haul feature
when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide
and your vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of a 6–Speed Automatic
Transmission (If Equipped)
Column-shift transmission:
E184457
Floor-shift transmission:
E184456
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
182
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Transmission
Manual (M) with floor shifter
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the
driver can change gears up or down as
desired. By moving the gearshift lever from
drive position drive (D) to manual (M) you
now have control of selecting the gear you
desire using buttons on the shift lever. See
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission later in this
section.
To return to normal drive (D) position,
move the shift lever back from manual (M)
to drive (D).
The transmission will operate in gears one
through six.
Third (3) with column shifter
Transmission operates in third (3) gear
only. Use third (3) gear for improved
traction on slippery roads.
Second (2)
Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.
First (1)
• Transmission operates in first (1) gear
only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift
lever.
• Will not downshift into first (1) gear at
high speeds; allows for first (1) gear
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Tow/Haul Mode
E161509
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever
once. The TOW HAUL indicator
light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
The tow/haul feature:
• Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
of transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which will slow your vehicle and
assist you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided will vary
based upon the amount the brake
pedal is pressed.
The tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using
tow/haul.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever twice. The
TOW HAUL light will deactivate. Tow/haul
will also deactivate when you power down
your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use the tow/haul feature
when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide
and your vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
Sport Mode
E176099
To activate Sport Mode, press
the button on the gearshift lever
twice. The SPORT or S indicator
light will illuminate in the instrument
display
183
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Transmission
The sport mode feature:
• Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
• Selects gears more quickly and at
higher engine speeds.
To deactivate the sport mode feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever once. The
SPORT or S indicator light will deactivate.
The sport mode feature will also
deactivate when your vehicle is powered
down.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and will not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully
update transmission operation.
Forced Downshifts
• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul
feature on or off.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (If Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift will still automatically
make some downshifts if it has determined
that you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift will make some
downshifts for you, it will still allow you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will
not be caused to the engine from
over-revving.
SelectShift will not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
PRS (Progressive Range Selection)
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with
an improved driving experience (for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep grade).
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press
the – button to active PRS. The available
and selected gears are indicated on the
instrument cluster.
184
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Transmission
All available gears will display with the
current gear indicated. Press the – button
again to lock out gears beginning with the
highest gear. Example: press the – button
twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only
the available gears will display and the
transmission will automatically shift
between the available gears. Press the +
button to unlock gears to allow the
transmission to shift to higher gears. The
transmission will shift automatically within
the gear range you select.
Manual (M) with floor shifter
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
(M) position will allow you to manually
select the gear you desire. Only the current
gear will display. Use the buttons on the
gearshift lever to manually select gears.
Press the + button to upshift or the –
button to downshift. Return the
transmission to a different gearshift
position to deactivate manual control.
E192285
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 – 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 – 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 – 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 – 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 – 6
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
WARNINGS
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking your vehicle out of park (P)
which means your vehicle can roll
freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheel chocks if appropriate.
185
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Transmission
WARNINGS
If you fully release the parking brake
and the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed,
a malfunction may have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 298).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
Column-shifter
1. Apply the parking brake and switch off
your vehicle.
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
4. Place fingers into gearshift lever boot
hole and pull top half of shroud up and
forward to separate it from the lower
half of the shroud. There is a hinge at
the forward edge of the top shroud.
Roll the top half of the shroud upward
on the hinge point to clear the hazard
flasher button, then pull straight
rearward toward the driver’s seat to
remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column.
E163185
7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
position and remove the lower shroud
cover by pulling the lever handle
through the slot in the cover.
E163186
8. Apply the brake, pull the white disk
then move the shifter to neutral (N).
9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as the halves rotate together.
Floor-shifter
1. Apply the parking brake and switch off
your vehicle.
186
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Transmission
2. Remove the rubber mat between the
shifter and cup holder. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), carefully
pry up the access panel from the
attachment points and disconnect it
from the console to expose the inside
of the gearshift.
E182464
3. Locate the white brake shift interlock
lever on the passenger side of the
shifter assembly.
E183128
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using light finger
pressure move the white lever forward
while pulling the gearshift lever out of
the park (P) position and into the
neutral (N) position.
5. Install the access panel and rubber
mat.
6. Apply brake pedal, start your vehicle,
and release the parking brake. See your
authorized dealer as soon as possible
if this procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
187
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Transmission
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
WARNING
For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle,
see General Information in the
Wheels and Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4H or 4L mode
is only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these
surfaces may produce some noise (such as
occasional clunks), but will not damage
drive components.
Note: If 4L is selected while your vehicle is
moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD
system will not perform a shift. This is
normal and should be no reason for concern.
Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low)
for proper operation.
4WD Indicator Lights
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer.
4X2
E181778
Momentarily illuminates when
2H is selected.
4X4 Auto
E181781
Continuously illuminates when
4A is selected (2-Speed
Automatic 4WD vehicles only).
4X4 HIGH
E181779
Continuously illuminates when
4H is selected.
4X4 LOW
E181780
Continuously illuminates when
4L is selected.
CHECK 4X4
Displays when a 4X4 fault is
present.
Using the Electronic Shift on the
Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)
E191851
2H (4X2)
For general on-road driving. Sends power
to the rear wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds.
4H (4X4 HIGH)
Used for extra traction such as in snow or
icy roads or in off road situations. This
mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
188
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
4L (4X4 LOW)
Uses extra gearing to provide maximum
power to all four wheels at reduced
speeds. Intended only for off-road
applications such as deep sand, steep
grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4x4
low) will not engage while your vehicle is
moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L
(4x4 low) for proper operation.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal while a shift in progress message
displays will improve
engagement/disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
You can move the control from 2H or 4H
at a stop or while driving. The information
display may display a message indicating
a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is
complete the message center will then
display the system mode selected.
Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired
position.
The information display will display a
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The information display will then
display the system mode selected. If any
of the above shift conditions are not
present, the shift will not occur and the
information display will display information
guiding the driver through the proper
shifting procedures.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD
displays in the information display, a
transfer case gear tooth blockage is
present. To alleviate this condition, place
the transmission in a forward gear, move
your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to
complete the range shift.
Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD
System (If Equipped)
This system includes an electronically
controlled transfer case with a high
capacity clutch. The system is interactive
with the road, continually monitoring and
adjusting torque delivery to the front and
rear wheels to optimize traction.
Note: The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the transfer
case clutch and disable it during driving
maneuvers when necessary.
E181500
189
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2H (4X2)
For general on-road driving, this mode
provides optimal smoothness and fuel
economy at high speeds. Sends power to
the rear wheels only.
4A (4X4 AUTO)
Provides electronic control four-wheel
drive with power delivered to the front and
rear wheels, as required, for increased
traction. This is appropriate for all on-road
driving conditions, including dry road
surfaces, but is especially useful on wet
pavement, snow, dirt, or gravel.
4H (4X4 HIGH)
Used for extra traction such as in snow or
icy roads or in off road situations. This
mode is not for use on dry pavement.
4L (4X4 LOW)
Uses extra gearing to provide maximum
power to all four wheels at reduced
speeds. Intended only for off-road
applications such as deep sand, steep
grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4x4
low) will not engage while your vehicle is
moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L
(4x4 low) for proper operation.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal while a shift in progress message
displays will improve
engagement/disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
You can move the control from 2H to 4A
or 4H at a stop or while driving. The
information display may display a message
indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once
the shift is complete the message center
will then display the system mode
selected.
Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired
position.
The information display will display a
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The information display will then
display the system mode selected. If any
of the above shift conditions are not
present, the shift will not occur and the
information display will display information
guiding the driver through the proper
shifting procedures.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD
displays in the information display, a
transfer case gear tooth blockage is
present. To alleviate this condition, place
the transmission in a forward gear, move
your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to
complete the range shift.
190
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
How Your Vehicle Differs From
Other Vehicles
WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity such as utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity.
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are
not designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these
vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Utility Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
your vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a front air dam that can become damaged
(due to reduced ground clearance) when
taking your vehicle off-road. You may
remove this air dam by removing eight bolts.
Note: Vehicles equipped with 2.7L
Ecoboost, 3.5L Ecoboost and 3.5L TiVCT
engines have an underbody transmission
shield and brackets that may become
damaged (due to reduced ground
clearance) when taking your vehicle
off-road. Remove the shield by disengaging
the fasteners at each corner of the shield.
Then, remove the shield rear brackets by
removing the bracket to frame bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
and rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both
on and off the road.
The transfer case supples power to all four
wheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the
transfer case allows you to select different
4WD modes when necessary. You can find
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures in this chapter. You can
find information on transfer case
maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar
with this information before you operate
your vehicle.
191
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
mode) uses all four wheels to power your
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot.
Basic Operating Principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
• Do not use four-wheel drive on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so will
produce excessive noise, increase tire
wear and may damage drive
components. Four-wheel drive modes
are only for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed decreases, ease
your vehicle back onto the road. Do not
turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
192
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Mud and Water
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves
by applying light pressure to the brake
pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
193
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Hints on Driving With
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 198).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Parking
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the gearshift is
latched in park (P). Turn the ignition
to the off position and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
194
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when
the transfer case is in the neutral (N)
position, the engine and transmission
disconnect from the rest of the driveline.
Therefore, your vehicle is free to roll even
if the automatic transmission is in park (P)
or the manual transmission is in gear. Do
not leave your vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the neutral (N) position.
Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving your vehicle.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (for example, lift kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement
parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(such as ladders or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
195
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
ELECTRONIC LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped)
Note: The electronic locking differential is
for off-road use only and is not for use on
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement will result in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
The electronic locking differential is a
device housed in the rear axle that allows
both rear wheels to turn at the same
speed. The electronic locking differential
can provide additional traction should your
vehicle become stuck. You can activate
the differential electronically and shift it
on the fly within the differential operating
speed range. The differential is for use in
mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition
where you need maximum traction. It is
not for use on dry pavement.
The following conditions will affect the
electronic locking differential:
• The electronic locking differential will
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2, 4x4
Auto, or 4x4 High modes.
• The electronic locking differential will
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4
Low.
• The electronic locking differential may
not engage if you press your
accelerator pedal during an
engagement attempt. A message may
display in the instrument display
guiding you to release the accelerator
pedal.
• In 4x2, 4x4 Auto, and 4x4 High modes,
the electronic locking differential will
automatically disengage at speeds
above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will
automatically reengage at speeds
below 20 mph (32 km/h).
• In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic locking
differential will automatically
disengage at speeds above 62 mph
(100 km/h) and will automatically
reengage at speeds below 56 mph
(90 km/h).
• The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the
electronic locking differential and
disable it during driving maneuvers
when necessary.
When you switch the system on, if you do
not meet the required conditions for
electronic locking differential activation,
the instrument cluster will display the
appropriate information guiding you
through the proper activation process.
Activating the Electronic Locking
Differential
Note: Do not use electronic locking
differential on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Doing so will produce excessive noise,
vibration and increase tire wear.
Note: If the electronic locking differential
has difficulty disengaging, release the
accelerator pedal and turn the steering
wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
For 4WD vehicles
E191852
Pull the 4WD control knob toward you.
196
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Rear Axle
For 2WD vehicles
E183740
Turn the control to ON.
E163170
Once the indicator light
illuminates in the information
display, both rear wheel axle
shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the
indicator turns off while driving, one of the
following has occurred:
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The left and right rear wheel speed
difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
• The system has malfunctioned and is
accompanied by CHECK LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL in the information
display. See your authorized Ford
dealer for assistance.
197
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 335).
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 103).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you turn the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
locked in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury.
198
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Brakes
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (If
Equipped)
The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional foot brake. The operating
switch is located on the instrument panel
left of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
locked in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury.
Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example, on
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may
reapply the brakes within ten minutes.
Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
Applying the Electric Parking
Brake
WARNING
The brake system warning lamp will
flash during an electric parking brake
apply. If the brake system warning
lamp continues to flash there could be a
problem with your electric parking brake.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
E169085
Pull the switch up to apply the electric
parking brake.
The brake system warning lamp will flash
for approximately two seconds and then
illuminate to confirm that the electric
parking brake has been applied. See
Information Displays (page 108).
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
remain illuminated for about ten seconds if
you switch the ignition off with the parking
brake applied, or apply the parking brake
while the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.
199
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Brakes
Applying the Electric Parking
Brake When the Vehicle is Moving
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake
while moving will result in use of the
anti-lock braking system. Do not use
the electric parking brake system when the
vehicle is moving unless the normal brake
system is unable to stop the vehicle.
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal does not work or is blocked),
do not apply the electric parking brake
while the vehicle is moving. On bends, or
poor road surfaces or weather conditions,
emergency braking can cause the vehicle
to skid out of control or off the road.
If you apply the electric parking brake when
your vehicle is moving, the brake system
warning lamp will illuminate and a warning
tone will sound. See Information
Displays (page 108).
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(6 km/h), the braking force is applied as
long as the switch is pulled. Release or
press the switch or press the accelerator
pedal to stop the braking force.
Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake
E169086
You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the switch or
automatically.
Manual Release
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes after
you have released the parking brake,
there could be a problem with your braking
system. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
You can manually release the electric
parking brake by:
• Switching the ignition on.
• Pressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the electric parking brake
switch.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the brake system warning lamp will turn
off.
Driving With a Trailer
Depending on the grade and the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
backwards slightly when you start on a
slope.
To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
1. Pull the switch up and hold it in this
position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.
200
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Brakes
Automatic Release - Drive Away
Release
Your vehicle will automatically release the
parking brake if:
• The driver door is closed.
• The transmission is in a forward or
reverse gear.
• The vehicle is accelerated.
• There are no faults detected in the
parking brake system.
The brake system warning lamp will go off
to confirm that you have released the
electric parking brake.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.
Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature will release the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has
sufficient drive force to move up the hill.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or
release the electric parking brake if
the battery is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake. Failure to leave your vehicle securely
parked may lead to a crash or injury. See
Parking Brake (page 198).
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The system will turn off if a
malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to
take care may result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you
bring your vehicle to a complete standstill
in an uphill gear (for example, drive (D)
when facing uphill or reverse (R) when
facing downhill).
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed.
201
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Brakes
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
202
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
E166706
The switch for the stability and traction
control system is on the instrument panel.
When you switch the system off, a
message and an illuminated icon appear
on the instrument cluster.
Use the switch again to return the traction
control system to normal operation.
Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions
regarding this feature. See Principle of
Operation (page 57).
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition activates either
of the systems.
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on:
• When you switch the traction control
system off.
• If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.
203
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the systems
applies higher brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 203).
204
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Stability Control
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability controlA
skidding off its intended route.
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac™ with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC™)
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You can switch the electronic stability
control systems off.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), the systems are disabled.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on independently. See Using
Traction Control (page 203).
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Traction
control system
Electronic
stability
control
Roll stability
control
Stability
control OFF
light
Button func-
tions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated
during bulb
check
Default at start-
up
DisabledEnabledEnabledIlluminatedButton pressed
momentarily
DisabledDisabledEnabledIlluminatedButton pressed
and held for
more than 5
seconds
205
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Stability Control
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Enabled with
higher threshold
target
Enabled with
higher threshold
target
EnabledIlluminatedDouble press
EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed
again after
deactivation
DisabledDisabledDisabledIlluminatedTransfer case
switched to
4WD Low
206
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control
descent in all surface conditions and
circumstances, such as ice or
extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.
Hill descent control does not provide
hill hold at zero miles per hour (0
kilometers per hour). When stopped,
the parking brake must be applied or the
vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it
may roll away.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep grades in various surface
conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20
mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained
use. The amount of time that the feature
can remain active before cooling varies
with conditions. The system will provide a
warning in the message center and a chime
will sound when the system is about to
disengage for cooling. At this time,
manually apply the brakes as needed to
maintain descent speed.
USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL
E163957
Press and release the hill
descent button located on the
instrument panel. A light in the
cluster will illuminate and a chime will
sound when this feature is activated.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the
desired speed. To decrease descent
speed, press the brake pedal until you
reach the desired speed.
When accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the desired descent speed,
remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen
vehicle speed.
Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may
be observed during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
Hill descent modes
• At speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h)
and 20 mph (32 km/h): When the Hill
Descent Control switch is pressed and
Hill Descent Control is active, the Hill
Descent Control indicator light flashes.
Your vehicle maintains your desired
speed.
• At speeds between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 40 mph (64 km/h): When the Hill
Descent Control switch is pressed, the
Hill Descent Control system is enabled,
the Hill Descent Control indicator light
is solid and a message displays in the
information display. Your vehicle does
not maintain your desired speed and
you cannot set your descent speed.
207
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
• At speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h):
When the Hill Descent Control switch
is pressed, the Hill Descent Control
system is disabled, the indicator light
in the cluster does not illuminate and
a message does not display in the
information display. The system is
turned off and you need to switch the
system back on to use.
Refer to the Information Displays for
additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 124).
208
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
PARKING AID (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations
of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when
moving in reverse on a flat surface at
parking speeds. Certain objects with
surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves,
traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps,
inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the
function of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging your vehicle. The system may
not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, it is possible to prevent turning
the sensing system off. See MyKey™ (page
57).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
trailer tow package and a trailer is
connected to your vehicle, the rear sensing
system will be disabled and will not allow
you to switch the system on through the
information display. When you shift your
vehicle into reverse (R), a message appears
in the information display stating that a
trailer is connected and the rear sensing
system is disabled. If equipped, the center
stack rear sensing system display will not
be present.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of the
bumper area. The system turns on
automatically when you switch on the
ignition.
When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume reduces to a predetermined
level. After the warning goes away, the
radio volume returns to the previous level.
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once the
transmission is shifted into reverse (R).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display and will not allow you to switch the
faulted system on.
Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
209
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
continuously. If a stationary or receding
object is detected farther than 12 in
(30 cm) from the side your vehicle, the
tone sounds for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object approaching,
the warning sounds again.
E130178
The coverage area is up to 6 feet
(1.8 meters) from the rear
bumper. There is decreased
coverage area at the outer
corners of the bumper.
A
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R):
• and moving toward a stationary object
at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• but not moving, and a moving object is
approaching the rear of your vehicle at
a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• and moving at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is fewer than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the center stack display
(if equipped). The distance indication will
be present when the transmission is in
reverse (R).
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases (obstacle becomes closer),
the indicator blocks will illuminate and
move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks will be grayed
out.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Designed to be a supplementary park
aid, this system may not work in all
conditions. This system cannot
replace the driver’s attention and
judgment. The driver is responsible for
avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe
distance and speed, even when the system
is in use.
Active Park Assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required.
Active Park Assist is an electronic parking
aid that uses ultrasonic sensors. The
system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers
your vehicle into the space (hands-free)
while you control the accelerator, gearshift
and brakes. The system visually and
audibly instructs you to park your vehicle.
210
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the
neighboring parked vehicle is high off the
ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or
flatbed truck).
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain, snow or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not
clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a foreign object
(bike rack or trailer) to the front or rear
of your vehicle or close to the sensors.
• You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
• A foreign object damages or obstructs
the sensors.
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
Using Active Park Assist
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever.
The touchscreen displays a message and
a corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to indicate which side
of your vehicle you want the system to
search.
Note: The system automatically searches
on the passenger side. You can use the
direction indicator to toggle between the
driver and passenger side.
Note: You can also activate the Active Park
Assist system after you have already driven
partially or completely past a parking space.
To do so, press the Active Park button and
the system will inform you if you have
recently passed a suitable parking space.
A
E130107
When the system finds a suitable space,
the touchscreen displays a message and
a tone sounds. Stop your vehicle and
follow the instructions on the touchscreen.
If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you
may need to pull forward a short distance
before the system is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
211
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: Active park assist may not detect
vehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or a
truck), street furniture such as benches and
fire hydrants and other items. You must
make sure the selected space is suitable for
parking.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the other
vehicles as possible while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if the
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the touchscreen shows a
message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h), the system turns off and you need
to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
Indicated by tones, instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space
appear on the display screen.
E130108
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a
touchscreen display message and a
chime), bring your vehicle to a complete
stop.
When automatic steering is finished, the
touch screen displays a message and a
tone sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is done. The driver is
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before putting the transmission in park (P).
Deactivating the Park Assist
Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during
automatic steering.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Turning off the traction control system.
212
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated on a
slippery or loose surface.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays, followed by a
tone. Occasional system messages may
occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an
authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect, you must
drive your vehicle for a short period of time before Active Park Assist becomes functional.
The system does not offer a particular space
Something may be contacting the sensors.
There is not enough room in the parking space for the vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
Your vehicle is farther than 4.9 ft (1.5 m) from the parking space.
Your vehicle is closer than 16 in (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles.
The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with
reverse (R) selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
213
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
You didn't wait for the steering wheel to complete its rotation after a gear change. The
system performs best when the steering wheel is allowed to finish rotating before
accelerating.
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera when the tailgate is
ajar. If the tailgate is ajar, the camera
will be out of position and the video image
may be incorrect. All guidelines have been
removed when the tailgate is ajar.
WARNINGS
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off while in reverse
(R). Make sure your vehicle is not
moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’ s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
E184050
214
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
The camera is located on the tailgate
handle.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle while reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in reverse (R), have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once you engage the trailer tow connector.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Pro
Trailer Backup Assist you can set-up the
trailer to work with the Rear View Camera
system. See Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
(page 253).
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
active or fixed guidelines are on.
215
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines only show with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If the steering
wheel position changes while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not show
when the steering wheel position is
straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle is not
shown. Be aware of your
surroundings when using the manual zoom
feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol on the camera screen to change
the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Camera System Settings
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the multifunctional display
when the transmission is not in reverse (R):
• Menu > Vehicle > Camera Settings
216
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Enhanced Park Aids
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch™
The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.
E190459
For additional information of the zone
coverage and the rear sensing system. See
Parking Aid (page 209).
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until your vehicle speed reaches
6 mph (10 km/h). This occurs when the
rear camera delay feature is on, or until a
radio button is pressed.
360 DEGREE CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The 360 degree camera system is a
supplement system that still requires
the driver to use it in conjunction with
looking out the windows, and checking the
interior and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
You may not see objects that are
close to either corner of the bumper
or under the bumper due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
Use caution when turning camera
features ON or OFF while out of park
(P). Make sure your vehicle is not
moving.
The 360 degree camera system consists
of front, side and rear cameras. The
system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of
the area outside your vehicle, including
the blind spots.
• Provides visibility around your vehicle
to you in parking maneuvers such as:
• Centering in a parking space.
• Obstacles near vehicle.
• Parallel parking.
217
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
E183663
The 360 degree camera system
button is located on the
instrument panel and allows you
to toggle through different camera views.
The front and rear cameras have multiple
screens which consist of: Normal view with
360, Normal view, and split view. When in
park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only the
front images will be displayed when the
button is pressed. When in reverse (R), only
the rear images will be displayed when the
button is pressed.
Note: The 360 degree camera system will
turn OFF when your vehicle is in motion at
low speed, except when in reverse (R).
Camera Views
The small vehicle icon displayed on the
top left corner of the image illustrates the
camera view being displayed. Camera
views are laid out in the order the screens
will appear once the button is pressed.
Note: The front video image will be
disabled when your vehicle is in motion at
low speed, except when in reverse (R).
• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal front camera view next to a
360 degree camera view. This view will
appear on the screen when the button
is pressed in any gear other than
reverse (R).
• Front Normal View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front of your
vehicle. Access this view by pressing
the camera button from the Front 360
+ Normal View screen.
• Front Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is in front of
your vehicle. Access this view by
pressing the camera button from the
Front Normal View screen.
• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal rear camera view next to a 360
degree camera view. This view can be
accessed by putting your vehicle in
reverse (R), or by pressing the camera
button from the Rear Split View screen.
• Rear Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
Access this view by pressing the
camera button from the Rear 360 +
Normal screen.
• Rear Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is behind your
vehicle. Access this view by pressing
the camera button from the Rear
Normal View screen.
Keep Out Zone
E184448
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
extended outside mirror position.
Front Camera
WARNING
The front camera system is an aid
supplement device that still requires
the driver to use it in conjunction with
looking out your vehicle.
218
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
E184044
The front video camera, located in the
grille, provides a video image of the area
in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance
to the driver while driving forward at low
speeds. To use the front video camera
system, place the transmission in any gear
except reverse (R). An image will display
once the camera enable button is pressed.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to your vehicle's orientation
and/or road condition.
Side Camera
E206263
The side view camera, located in the
outside mirror, provide a video image of
the area on the sides of your vehicle as part
of the front 360 + normal view and rear
360 + normal view. It aids you while
parking your vehicle either forward or
backwards.
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view
while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
219
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or, when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes. Change down a gear to
assist the system in maintaining the set
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
E191819
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The indicator color changes.
220
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal, this
action does not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF or switch the
ignition off.
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions, especially
when using adaptive cruise control.
Adaptive cruise control cannot replace
attentive driving. Failing to follow any of
the warnings below or failing to pay
attention to the road may result in a crash,
serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
roadway.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a
highway, in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Do not use in poor visibility,
specifically fog, rain, spray or snow.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and control the vehicle at all
times.
The system adjusts your speed to maintain
a proper distance between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select from one of four gap settings.
E183737
The controls for using your cruise control
are located on the steering wheel.
221
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Switching the System On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The information display shows
the grey indicator light.
E183738
The current gap setting and SET also
shows.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+. The memory
stores the vehicle speed.
3. The information display shows a green
indicator light, current gap setting and
the desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E183738
5. A lead vehicle graphic illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front of
you, your vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
the adaptive cruise control system is active.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. The
distance setting is adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic illuminates.
The vehicle maintains a constant distance
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of your lane or out of view.
• The vehicle speed falls below 12.4 mph
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.
222
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The system applies the brakes to slow the
vehicle to maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front. The system applies
only limited maximum braking. Press the
brake pedal to override the system.
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level is insufficient, an audible
warning sounds while the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
appears on the windshield heads-up
display. Take immediate action to slow or
stop the vehicle.
The system may provide slight temporary
acceleration when you use your driver side
directional indicator while following a lead
vehicle, to aid in passing the vehicle.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
E183739
Gap decrease.A
Gap increase.B
Press the gap control to decrease or
increase the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you.
E183738
Bars in the graphic show the selected gap
distance. You can select between four gap
settings.
223
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Adaptive cruise control distance-between-vehicle settings
Dynamic beha-
vior
Distance gapTime gap,
seconds
Graphic display,
bars indicated
between
vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport.31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal.43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal.55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort.67 (61)2.2462 (100)
Each time you start the vehicle, the system
selects the last chosen gap for the current
driver.
Disengaging the System
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL. The
last set speed displays in grey but does not
erase.
Overriding the System
WARNING
Whenever you press the accelerator
pedal and override the system, the
system no longer automatically
applies the brakes to maintain separation
from any vehicle ahead.
While you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the lead vehicle
graphic does not show in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or to a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
• Accelerate or brake to the desired
speed, then press and release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
desired set speed shows on the
information display. The vehicle speed
gradually changes to the selected
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed changes in approximately
1.2 mph (2 km/h).
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Press and release RES. The vehicle returns
to the previously set speed. The set speed
shows continuously in the information
display while the system is active.
224
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Low Speed Automatic
Cancellation
The system does not function at vehicle
speeds below 12.4 mph (20 km/h). An
audible alarm sounds and the automatic
braking releases if the vehicle drops below
this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have
cooled.
Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
it from overheating.
Switching the System Off
Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.
Press and release OFF or switch off the
ignition.
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The lead vehicle graphic
does not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
225
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
In these cases the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. Stay alert and take action
when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detections.
Contact an authorized dealer to have them
check for proper coverage and operation.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Note: If you disable electronic stability
control, adaptive cruise control is not
available. See Using Stability Control
(page 205).
Blocked Sensor
WARNINGS
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with aftermarked trailer
brake controls. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when you
switch the system on because the brakes
are electronically controlled. Failing to do
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use adaptive cruise control
while you have a snow plow blade
installed.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failing to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
E183741
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. The system cannot
detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function when something obstructs the
radar signals. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this
message displaying.
226
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
have a blockage. This can happen, for
example, when driving in sparse rural or
desert environments. A false blocked
condition either self clears or clears after
a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have
selected and apply the brakes when
necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display. See
General Information (page 108).
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, the system does
not automatically respond to lead vehicles
and automatic braking is not active. The
system recalls its last setting when you
start your vehicle.
227
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed
to aid you. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment.
You are still responsible to drive with due
care and attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
will be active at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off
through the information display by
selecting Settings then Driver Assist then
Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,
the system will monitor your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: Note: The system will not issue
warnings below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary warning
that you need to take a rest. This message
will only appear for a short time. If the
system detects further reduction in driving
alertness, another warning may be issued
which will remain in the information display
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering
wheel control to clear the warning. When
active the system will run automatically in
the background and only issue a warning
if required.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
228
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short
period, the system will alert you to put your
hands on the steering wheel. The system
may detect a light grip or touch on the
steering wheel as hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a
MyKey® is detected. If the system detects
a MyKey®, it defaults to on and the mode
is set to alert.
Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system. You can only change the mode
and intensity settings.
E173233
Press the button located on the
center console to switch the
system on or off.
System Settings
The system has one standard feature
setting and one optional setting menu
available. To view or adjust the settings,
See General Information (page 108). The
system stores the last known selection for
each of these settings. You do not need to
readjust your settings each time you turn
on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when an unintended lane
departure is detected.
E165516
Aid only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
229
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance
steering torque input toward the lane
center. If your vehicle continues drifting out
of the lane, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
• Low
• Medium
• High
System Display
E144813
When you switch on the system,
an overhead graphic of a vehicle
with lane markings will display
in the information display.
E173234
If you select aid mode when you
switch on the system, arrows will
be displayed with lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still be displayed if adaptive cruise control
is enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings will change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• Your turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain,
fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or
shadowing the lane), or vehicle
conditions (poor headlamp
illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
You can temporarily disable the system at
any time by doing the following
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using your direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
230
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in
the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
231
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in
the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows or trailers
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
232
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
When the Blind Spot Information System
is alerting on a vehicle and the
corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind
Spot Information System alert indicator
flashes as an increased warning level.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
at the same time.
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and
snow in front of the sensors and/or driving
in heavy rain can cause system
degradation. Also, other types of
obstructions in front of the sensor can
cause system degradation. This is referred
to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
233
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the BLIS alert
indicators will remain ON and BLIS will no
longer provide any vehicle warnings. You
can clear the information display warning
but the alert indicators will remain
illuminated.
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in
two ways:
• After the blockage in front of the
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing
vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Blind Spot
Information System off. If your vehicle has
a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer
tow module, it is recommended to turn the
Blind Spot Information System off
manually. Operating the Blind Spot
Information System with a trailer attached
will cause poor system performance.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display. See Information
Messages (page 124).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page
108). When the Blind Spot Information
System switches off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display shows
a system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
the Blind Spot Information System on or
off, the alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
remembers the last selected on or off
setting.
You can also have the Blind Spot
Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the Cross Traffic Alert system as
a replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions
while your transmission is in reverse (R).
234
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect
vehicles that approach with a speed up to
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases
when the sensors are partially, mostly or
fully obstructed. Reversing slowly helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
E142441
235
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an
amber alert indicator in the outside mirror
on the side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert
also sounds an audible alert and a
message appears in the information
display indicating a vehicle is coming from
the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works
with the reverse sensing system that
sounds its own series of tones. See
Parking Aid (page 209).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 232). If the
Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A
corresponding message appears in the
information display as soon as you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection.
236
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no
factory equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert
with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross
Traffic Alert performance.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will
appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 124).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
Alert off in the information display. See
General Information (page 108). When
you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will
not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently,
the system can only be switched back on
at an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you
may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Obtain immediate service from
an authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
237
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
Principle Of Operation (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
This system is an extra driving aid. It
does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail
to press the brake pedal when necessary,
you may collide with another vehicle.
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent
all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace your judgment and the
need to maintain correct distance and
speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of your vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Note: The collision warning system will be
unavailable if you disable the electronic
stability control. See Using Stability
Control (page 205).
E156130
The system alerts you of certain collision
risks. The system's sensor detects your
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.
238
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
E156131
When your vehicle rapidly approaches
another vehicle, a red warning light flashes
and a tone sounds.
The brake support system assists you in
reducing any collision speed by
pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of
collision continues to increases after the
audio-visual warning, the brake support
prepares the brake system for rapid
braking. The system does not
automatically activate the brakes, but if
the brake pedal is pressed even lightly, the
brakes apply full stopping power.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’ s brake
support reduces collision speed only
if you brake your vehicle before any
collision. As in any typical braking situation,
you must press your brake pedal.
You can use your information display
control to adjust the collision warning
system's sensitivity or to turn the system
On or Off. Your vehicle will remember
these settings across key cycles. You may
change the collision warning system
sensitivity to any one of three possible
settings. See General Information (page
108).
Note: It is recommended that you turn the
collision warning system off if a snow plow
or similar object is installed in such a way
that it may block the radar sensor. Your
vehicle will remember the selected setting
across key cycles.
Note: When possible, the manufacturer
recommends using the highest sensitivity
setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced
sensitivity causes fewer and later system
warnings. See General Information (page
108).
Blocked Sensors
E183741
If a blocked sensor message appears in the
information display, dirt, water, or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. If anything blocks the
sensor, your vehicle cannot see through
the sensor, and the collision warning
system will not work. Possible causes for
the blocked sensor message and corrective
actions are listed below.
239
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
ActionCause
Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the
obstruction
The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty
or obstructed
Wait a short time. The radar may take
several minutes to reset after you remove
the obstruction
The surface of the radar sensor cover is
clean but the message remains in the
display
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Shortly after weather conditions
improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air
interferes with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Shortly after weather conditions
improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Swirling water, snow or ice on the road
surface interferes with the radar signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’ s brake
support only reduces collision speed
if you first apply your brakes. You
must brake as you would in any typical
braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).
Damage to the front end of your vehicle
may alter the radar sensor's coverage area.
This may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.
240
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES (If
Equipped)
BoxLink™ Cleats
These cleats attach to the inner box walls
to help you to tie down cargo. The cleats
can be locked to prevent removal or
unlocked for removal.
BoxLink Cleats
Note: Leave the key in the lock when
removing or installing the cleats. The key
cannot be removed from the lock unless it
is in the locked position.
E184885
A. 275 lb (1,223 N) maximum force
between directly opposed cleats.
B. 600 lb (2,669 N) maximum force
between diagonally opposed cleats.
Secure cargo with up to 275 lb (1,223 N)
force applied between opposing box link
cleats, or up to 600 lb (2,669 N) force
applied between diagonal box link cleats.
Removing Locking BoxLink Cleats
1. Insert the key into the lock and turn
clockwise to unlock.
2. Pull bottom of the cleat outward while
pushing top of cleat down.
3. Hold on to the cleat as it clears the
mounting slot.
Installing Locking BoxLink Cleats
E189558
1. Insert the key into lock and turn
clockwise to unlock.
2. Insert the cleat into the mounting slot
and push upward. Make sure the cleat
is fully engaged.
241
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
3. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock.
4. Remove the key.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If you install
any aftermarket or
authorized-dealer installed
equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
242
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E210944
E210945
E143817
CARGO
243
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
Cargo Weight - includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus
cargo, plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). It is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The Gross Vehicle Weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
244
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
Example only:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
E143819
GCW
GVW
245
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded
trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with mandatory options,
driver and front passenger weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms]
each), no cargo weight (internal
or external) and a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an
11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
(782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
246
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
247
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, should be
taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo
and people than most passenger
cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may
raise the center of gravity of the
vehicle.
BED ACCESS (If Equipped)
Box Side Step
Use the step for easier access to the
vehicle bed.
Note: Close the step before driving.
Note: Do not exceed 500 lb (227 kg) on
the step. This includes you plus cargo.
Note: Do not use the step to lift the vehicle.
Only use proper jacking points.
Note: The step may operate more slowly
in cool temperatures.
Note: The step mechanism may trap debris
such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and salt. This
may prevent the step from deploying
automatically when you press the button.
If this happens, make sure that you press
the button down and carefully pull out the
step manually. Wash off the debris with a
high-pressure sprayer and stow the step.
248
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
Deploying the Step
E167268
Push down on the button with your foot.
The step automatically extends from the
stowed position.
Stowing the Step
E167269
Push the step under your vehicle with your
foot until it fully latches. Do not push on
the button while stowing the step.
BED RAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The slide action of the ramp is a
pinch point. Do not place fingers or
hands in the pinch point.
Extend and retract the ramp only
when connected to the tailgate
plate.
WARNINGS
Be sure the ramp is installed
correctly when loading and
unloading equipment on and off the
ramp.
Do not step or sit on the ramp when
it is in the stowed position.
Install the ramp only within the
prescribed ramp angles.
Note: The ramp maximum capacity is
800 lb (363 kg).
Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground
before usage.
Note: For loading and unloading
equipment, your ramp should be set
between 10° upward and 26° downward to
avoid damage to the ramp claw and tailgate
plate.
Using the Bed Ramp
1. Remove the front and rear cables.
E194380
2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew
the cam bolts.
3. Remove the ramp from the ramp
holder.
249
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
E211150
Note: A smooth surface tool can be used
to rotate the stops.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the open position.
E194382
5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate
plate.
E194383
6. Pull the location pin outward and
extend the ramp until the pin is seated
in the usage position, then set the ramp
on even ground.
Stowing the Bed Ramp
1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin
outward.
2. Slide the ramp into the storage position
until the location pin locks.
Note: Make sure the proper pin location has
been applied for your bed size.
3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate
plate.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the closed position.
250
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
E194391
5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.
6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam
lever arms.
7. Attach the front and rear cables.
Installing the Ramp Holder
E194387
1. Hook the top of the ramp holder over
the mounting plate and rotate the
ramp holder into position.
E194388
2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards
into the installed position.
3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.
Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.
251
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: To prevent your trailer from
accumulating distance, and the
trailer information status appearing
when you restart your vehicle after
disconnecting your trailer, you must
deactivate your trailer. Using the
information display, go to the
Towing menu and then the Select
Trailer option. Select the No active
trailer option. See Information
Displays (page 108).
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 298).
Your vehicle may have ability to
modify trailer towing features.
See General Information (page
108).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
252
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
242).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
PRO TRAILER BACKUP
ASSIST™
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices.
Note: You must always be aware of the
vehicle and trailer combination and the
surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or
prevent the vehicle or trailer from making
contact with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.
Note: Keep in mind that the front end of
the vehicle swings out when changing the
direction of the trailer.
Note: The system relies on user
measurements to determine sticker
placement and system limits. It is critical to
take the key measurements correctly.
Incorrect measurements can result in the
improper function of the system up to and
including contact between the vehicle and
trailer.
Note: The system limits vehicle speed when
backing up. The system is not a replacement
for proper use of the throttle and brake
pedals.
Principle of Operation
This feature helps you to steer your vehicle
when backing up with a trailer attached.
Turn and hold the control knob in the
direction you want the trailer to go and the
system takes over the steering. This allows
you to focus on checking the mirrors and
operating the brake and accelerator.
Each trailer you use with your vehicle has
to be setup once.
You must take care to follow the setup
process accurately, to make sure the
sticker is placed correctly.
253
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
Note: Once you have entered a trailer's
information into the system, it is stored for
easy recall. A maximum of 10 trailers can be
added to the system.
Step 1: Position your Vehicle and Trailer
Hitch your conventional trailer to your
vehicle. See Essential Towing Checks
(page 269).
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.
E209759
Make sure your vehicle and the trailer are
in line with each other. You can do this by
driving straight forward.
E209760
Step 2: Follow the Information Display
Prompts
Press the button to turn the system on.
E209765
1. Select the option to add a trailer in the
instrument cluster menu, using the
steering wheel control. See General
Information (page 108).
2. Add a personalized name for the trailer
using the screen prompts. Use the
down arrow to scroll to the desired
letter and then press the right arrow to
advance to the next letter. Press OK to
continue.
3. Select the type of trailer brake system
for the trailer you are adding.
4. Select the brake effort level for the
trailer.
Note: The default option is low. This is
recommended for most trailers. If the
trailer's brakes require more initial voltage,
or if you prefer more aggressive braking then
select the other options as required.
254
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
5. Select the trailer type.
Some examples of conventional type
trailers are shown below.
Note: You cannot use the system with the
types of trailers marked with the cross.
The system only works with
conventional trailers. It does not work
with other types including goose neck
and fifth wheel.
E209766
Follow the information display prompts.
Step 3: Place the Sticker on the Trailer
Frame
The supplied sticker must be placed in an
area visible by the Rear View Camera.
Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn on automatically to improve visibility.
Note: An assistant can help to carry out the
following procedure.
Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the
Rear View Camera's view of the sticker. For
example, items such as a jack handle or
wiring.
Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and
clean horizontal surface. For best results
apply the sticker when temperatures are
above 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not move stickers after they are
placed. Do not re-use any stickers if
removed.
E209805
Use the supplied measurement card, a
tape measure and pen to carefully mark
the area where to attach the sticker
(supplied in the back cover pocket of your
quick start guide). Make sure the whole
sticker is within the zone between the two
arcs or distance markers on the diagram,
and is also visible in the Rear View Camera
display.
Step 4: Take Measurements
After the sticker is correctly placed on the
trailer you must take some key
measurements.
Note: Accurate measurements must be
taken for the system to operate properly.
Note: Round measurement figures to the
nearest half inch.
Note: Round upward if the measured length
is a quarter inch or greater. Round
downward if the measure length is less than
a quarter inch. For example 12.25 in
(31.11 cm) would be rounded up to 12.50 in
(31.75 cm). 12.13 in (30.8 cm) would be
rounded down to 12.00 in (30.48 cm).
Note: Use consistent metric or imperial
units as required by your country or vehicle.
Record the four key distances (A, B, C, D)
as required by the measurement card.
Record the trailer name for these
measurements.
255
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
E209806
A
B
C
D
D
Distance A
The horizontal distance from the license
plate to the center of the ball hitch on the
trailer.
Distance B
The horizontal distance from the center of
the ball hitch to the center of the sticker.
Distance C
The distance from the Rear View Camera
to the center of the sticker.
Distance D
The distance from the tailgate to the
center of the trailer axle (single axle
trailers), or the center of the axles (trailers
with dual axles or more).
Step 5: Enter Measurements Using the
Information Display
Using the recorded measurements, enter
the required data into the system. Follow
the on screen prompts to enter each of the
measurements taken in step 4. When all
four distances have been entered, a
confirmation display will appear. Check
the values are correct before proceeding,
or go back to change any if required.
Step 6: Confirming the Sticker Location
Check the Rear View Camera display to
see if the sticker is identified by the system
and marked with a red circle.
Confirm that the red circle is correctly
located over the sticker image in the
display. The on screen prompt will ask you
to confirm this.
Note: If the system cannot locate the
sticker try cleaning the camera lens, and
also make sure the sticker is within the green
zone as indicated in step 3.
Calibrating the System
To complete setup, drive your vehicle
straight forward between 4 mph (6 km/h)
and 24 mph (39 km/h) following the on
screen prompt.
Note: Check your measurements to make
sure you measured from the correct points.
Note: If you move the steering wheel during
this procedure, the calibration pauses.
Note: We recommend that you do not do
this at night.
A message will be displayed during
calibration and after calibration is
complete.
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist
To use the system press the button and
select the required trailer from the display.
256
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
E209765
When the sticker is located, the display
prompts you to shift into reverse (R). The
system turns on.
Note: The system does not function if your
hands are on the steering wheel. Remove
your hands to resume operation.
Follow the screen prompts to steer your
vehicle and trailer.
Note: You may have to drive forward to
straighten the trailer.
Take your hands off the steering wheel and
turn the Pro Trailer Backup Assist control
knob instead. The knob acts as the steering
control for the trailer.
Note: The more you turn the knob, the
sharper the trailer turns.
E209812
Turn and hold counterclockwise to make
the trailer go left.
E209813
Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer
go right.
Note: Practice maneuvering with the
system in a safe open area first.
Note: Try backing up in a straight line and
then turning the knob slowly in the direction
you want to go.
Note: Quickly turning and releasing the
knob results in a jerky movement of the
vehicle.
E209814
257
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Release the knob when the trailer is
moving in the direction you want. Control
the accelerator and brakes while the
system steers your vehicle automatically
to keep the trailer moving straight back.
Note: Your vehicle speed is automatically
limited.
Note: When you release the knob or turn it
to the center position, your vehicle follows
the trailer's path.
Troubleshooting
Setup
The system is designed to be used with a
wide variety of trailers. However there are
some trailers that do not have a proper
surface and location to mount the sticker.
These trailers are not supported. Attempts
to place the sticker on a surface that does
not meet the sticker placement
requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup
instruction or entering inaccurate
measurements to proceed through setup
can result in improper system function.
Accurate measurements are critical to
correct system function. If you need to
check measurements entered or change
them you can access them through the
trailer menus in the instrument cluster.
Choose the option to change the sticker
from the change trailer settings menu. It is
not necessary to remove the sticker if you
are just reviewing or changing
measurements.
The following menu warnings or difficulties
may occur during setup. Tips to resolve
them are listed below.
Measurement A has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• The system is designed to work with
drawbars that have a license plate to
hitch ball center measurement of 9 in
(229 mm) to 16 in (406 mm) when
installed. Do not attempt to use
drawbars that have a length outside
this range as the system performance
will be degraded and could cause
improper system function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from license plate and the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any vertical rise or drop will
increase the measurement and make
it inaccurate. Inaccurate
measurements will degrade system
performance and could cause improper
system function. See step 4 of the
setup instruction to review
measurement instructions.
Measurement B has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement
instruction in step 3 of the setup has
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone will adversely affect
the system performance and could
cause improper feature function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from center of sticker to the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any veritical rise or drop will
increase the measurement and cause
an inaccurate value to be entered into
the system. See step 4 of the setup for
additional measurement instructions.
258
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Measurement C has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement
instructions in step 3 of the setup have
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone will adversely affect
the system performance and could
cause improper feature function. If you
have met all the criteria for sticker
placement and you see this message
this sticker is either too far below or too
close to the camera to properly
recognize the sticker. In order for the
system to operate correctly the sticker
height must be lowered if you receive
the minimum warning or the sticker
height must be raised if you receive the
maximum warning.
• Only one sticker can be placed on
the trailer for correct system
function. The previous sticker must
be removed or covered so only one
sticker is visible to the camera.
• Measurement B and C must be
measured again if a new sticker is
placed on the trailer.
Measurement D has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from tailgate to the center of the single
axle or the center of all the axles on the
trailer. See step 4 of the setup for
additional measurement instructions.
The TBA system does not support
trailer lengths outside the range
allowed by the information display.
System is circling something beside the
sticker or system cannot find the sticker:
• Make sure the rear camera is clean and
the sticker is clearly visible in the
camera image. Clean the camera and
sticker if necessary.
• The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate sticker
measurements will degrade the
system’s ability to locate the sticker.
Verify the measurements entered into
the system are accurate.
• If you cannot resolve the issue a new
sticker location should be tried. The
sticker location must still meet the
requirements noted in step 3 of the
setup instructions. Only one sticker can
be placed on the trailer for correct
system function. The previous sticker
must be removed or covered so only
one sticker is visible to the camera.
Calibration
The system monitors various vehicle
parameters to ensure your vehicle is being
driven straight and the trailer straight
behind your vehicle. Any steering input or
trailer movement will pause the calibration.
For best results:
• Use a long, straight and smooth road
when attempting to calibrate.
• Drive straight forward.
• Drive between 5 mph (8 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h).
System Operation
The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during feature operation. Tips to
resolve them are listed below.
259
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
The system is not available:
• The system relies on many
sub-systems in your vehicle to operate
correctly. If those sub-systems are not
operating correctly the system may not
be available.
• Low battery voltage is a condition
which will prevent the system from
operating. Please make sure the
battery is correctly charged if the
system is not available.
• You may need to drive your vehicle
straight forward above 25 mph
(40 km/h) before the system is
available again.
• If the message still displays take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.
Sticker lost:
• Check for the following if you receive
the lost sticker message while using
the system.
• Stop your vehicle as soon as the
message displays.
• Make sure the sticker is visible in
the rear view camera image.
• Clean the sticker and camera to
make sure they are unobstructed.
• Remove any items that may be
blocking the view of the sticker.
Depending on your trailer
configuration and any equipment
mounted to your trailer it is possible
for the sticker to be blocked from
view of the camera as it rotates on
the hitch ball but not be blocked
during setup. Remove the
obstruction if possible. It wil be
necessary to remove the sticker
from it’s current location if the
obstruction cannot be cleared and
place a new sticker that will be
visible to the camera in all positions
of the trailer behind your vehicle.
• You can change your sticker
location by going into the trailer
menu, selecting trailer options,
selecting change trailer settings
and then selecting the change
sticker option. The previous sticker
must be removed. ONLY ONE
STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED
ON THE TRAILER FOR CORRECT
SYSTEM FUNCTION.
• The camera system uses the
entered measurements to help
locate the sticker. Inaccurate
measurements will reduce the
system’s ability to locate the
sticker. Check the measurements
entered into the system are correct.
Refer to the step 4 of Pro trailer
backup Assist setup for instructions
on measurements.
• You can change your measurement
by going into the trailer menu,
selecting trailer options, selecting
change trailer setting and then
selecting the change sticker option.
Disregard the prompt to remove
this sticker and continue to the next
step if you only plan to update the
measurements for the current
sticker location.
System will not backup straight:
• Factors such as the drawbar
connection to the hitch receiver, road
camber, road grade and compliance in
the trailer suspension can influence
how straight the system is able to back
your trailer when the knob is not turned.
You can compensate for the trailer
drifting to the right or left by slowly
turning the Pro Trailer Backup Assist
260
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
knob until the trailer is following your
desired path and then holding the knob
in that position. If you would like to
recalibrate the system for straight
backing, you can do so with the
following procedure.
• Go into the trailer menu, select
trailer options, select change trailer
setting and then select the change
sticker option. Your saved
measurements will be displayed.
Do not change them but continue
to confirm measurements. Once
you confirm the measurements, the
system will then prompt you to
perform the calibration procedure.
System consistently shows Stop Now Max
trailer angle reached warning:
• The system uses your measurements
to determine sticker position and
establish system limits. Accurate
sticker placement and trailer
measurements will provide the best
system performance. If you are
consistently receiving this warning it is
likely there is an issue with sticker
placement or the entered
measurements. Make sure that the
sticker is placed correctly based on
steps 3 and the measurements were
made correctly according to Step 4.
The troubleshooting guide for trailer
measurements can also be reviewed
for help in making measurements.
• To change sticker location or
change trailer measurements, go
into the trailer menu, select trailer
options, select change trailer
setting and then select the change
sticker option.
• If the sticker location needs to be
changed, the previous sticker must
be removed and a new sticker
needs to be placed on the trailer.
ONLY ONE STICKER SHOULD
BE PLACED ON THE TRAILER
FOR PROPER SYSTEM
FUNCTION.
• Disregard the prompt to remove
this sticker and continue to the next
step if you only plan to update the
measurements for the current
sticker location.
261
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
System consistently shows Stop now take
control of steering warning:
• The system displays this warning when
it can no longer steer the vehicle and
you must take over steering. There are
four reasons why this warning displays
and additional information regarding
the reason for the warning is available
on the center display.
• The steering wheel is touched while
the system is controlling it. Avoid
touching the wheel during system
operation.
• The maximum speed for feature
operation is exceeded. System
performance is optimized at slower
speeds. Backup slowly.
• The sticker was lost by the camera
system. Once your vehicle is
stopped additional warnings will
indicate the sticker was lost. Refer
to sticker lost trouble shooting tips.
• An internal condition for system
operation was not met which
requires your vehicle return to
manual control of the steering.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the
road and check for proper tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 241).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of
5,100 lb (2,313 kg) when towing with, or by,
bumper only.
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of
5,100 lb (2,313 kg) if your vehicle is not
equipped with a Heavy Duty Trailer Towing
Package.
Note: Make sure to take into consideration
trailer frontal area. Vehicles not equipped
with the Trailer Tow Package or the Heavy
Duty Payload Package should not exceed
36.6 feet
2
(3.4 meters
2
) trailer frontal area.
Vehicles equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package or the Heavy Duty Payload
Package should not exceed 60 feet
2
(5.6
meters
2
) trailer frontal area.
Note: Exceeding this limitation may
significantly reduce the performance of your
towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low
aerodynamic drag and rounded front design
helps optimize performance and fuel
economy.
262
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce
the gross combined weight by 2% per
1,000 ft (305 m) starting at the 1,000 ft
(305 m) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric trailer
brakes for trailers over a specified weight.
Be sure to check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum trailer
weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as your vehicle's electrical
system may not include the wiring
connector needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the
maximum trailer weight is less than or
equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your vehicle configuration on the
following charts.
Driveline – 4x2
1
Maximum GCWR
2, 3
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheelbase
(inches)
9400 lb (4264 kg)
4
3.55
3.5L TiVCT
Regular cab – 122
12000 lb (5443 kg)3.73
12200 lb (5533 kg)3.31
2.7L GTDI
13100 lb (5942 kg)3.73
13000 lb (5897 kg)3.31
5.0L TiVCT
13800 lb (6260 kg)3.55
9500 lb (4309 kg)
4
3.55
3.5L TiVCT
Regular cab – 141
12100 lb (5488 kg)3.73
12300 lb (5579 kg)3.31
2.7L GTDI
13100 lb (5942 kg)3.73
13300 lb (6032 kg)
5
3.73
13900 lb (6305 kg)3.31
5.0L TiVCT
14900 lb (6758 kg)3.55
16000 lb (7257 kg)
6
3.73
15500 lb (7030 kg)3.153.5L GTDI
263
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x2
1
Maximum GCWR
2, 3
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheelbase
(inches)
17000 lb (7711 kg)
7
3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
6, 7
3.73
9800 lb (4445 kg)
4
3.55
3.5L TiVCT
Super Cab – 145
12200 lb (5534 kg)3.73
12500 lb (5670 kg)3.31
2.7L GTDI
13100 lb (5942 kg)3.73
13300 lb (6032 kg)
5
3.73
12000 lb (5443 kg)
8
3.31
5.0L TiVCT
14200 lb (6441 kg)
13500 lb (6123 kg)
8
3.55
15200 lb (6895 kg)
15800 lb (7167 kg)3.15
3.5L GTDI
17100 lb (7756 kg)
7
3.55
12600 lb (5715 kg)3.31
2.7L GTDI
Super Cab – 163
13100 lb (5942 kg)3.73
13300 lb (6032 kg)
5
3.73
14300 lb (6486 kg)3.31
5.0L TiVCT 15300 lb (6940 kg)3.55
16200 lb (7348 kg)3.73
15900 lb (7212 kg)3.15
3.5L GTDI 17100 lb (7756 kg)
7
3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
6, 7
3.73
12200 lb (5534 kg)3.733.5L TiVCT
Crew cab – 145
264
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x2
1
Maximum GCWR
2, 3
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheelbase
(inches)
9900 lb (4491 kg)3.55
12600 lb (5715 kg)3.31
2.7L GTDI
13100 lb (5942 kg)3.73
13300 lb (6032 kg)
5
3.73
12000 lb (5443 kg)
8
3.31
5.0L TiVCT
14200 lb (6441 kg)
13500 lb (6123 kg)
8
3.55
15200 lb (6895 kg)
15800 lb (7167 kg)3.15
3.5L GTDI
17000 lb (7711 kg)
7
3.55
12600 lb (5715 kg)3.31
2.7L GTDI
Crew cab – 157
13100 lb (5942 kg)3.73
13300 lb (6032 kg)
5
3.73
12000 lb (5443 kg)
8
3.31
5.0L TiVCT
14200 lb (6441 kg)
13500 lb (6123 kg)
8
3.55
15200 lb (6895 kg)
16200 lb (7348 kg)
6
3.73
15900 lb (7212 kg)3.153.5L GTDI
265
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x2
1
Maximum GCWR
2, 3
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheelbase
(inches)
17100 lb (7756 kg)
7
3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
6, 7
3.73
1
Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5100 pounds (2313 kilograms) unless the vehicle is
equipped with the Heavy Duty Trailer Tow package or the MAX Trailer Tow package.
2
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
3
Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise).
4
Medium Duty Trailer Tow package – 5100 pound (2313 kilogram) maximum trailer weight.
5
2.7L EcoBoost Payload Package.
6
Heavy Duty Payload Package.
7
MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package.
8
Sport package.
Driveline – 4x4
1
Maximum GCWR
2, 3
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheelbase
(inches)
12200 lb (5534 kg)3.73
3.5L TiVCT
Regular cab – 122
9700 lb (4400 kg)3.55
12500 lb (5670 kg)3.55
2.7L GTDI
13300 lb (6032 kg)3.73
13200 lb (5987 kg)3.31, 3.55
5.0L TiVCT
14600 lb (6622 kg)3.73
12200 lb (5534 kg)3.733.5L TiVCT
Regular cab – 141
12500 lb (5670 kg)3.55
2.7L GTDI
13300 lb (6032 kg)3.73
13300 lb (6032 kg)
4
3.73
266
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x4
1
Maximum GCWR
2, 3
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheelbase
(inches)
14100 lb (6396 kg)3.31, 3.55
5.0L TiVCT
16200 lb (7348 kg)3.73
16200 lb (7348 kg)
5
3.73
15800 lb (7167 kg)3.31
3.5L GTDI
15800 lb (7167 kg)3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
6
3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
5, 6
3.73
12200 lb (5534 kg)3.733.5L TiVCT
Super Cab – 145
12700 lb (5761 kg)3.55
2.7L GTDI
13300 lb (6032 kg)3.73
13300 lb (6032 kg)
4
3.73
13500 lb (6123 kg)
7
3.31
5.0L TiVCT
14300 lb (6486 kg)
14000 lb (6350 kg)
7
3.55
14400 lb (6532 kg)
16200 lb (7348 kg)3.73
16000 lb (7167 kg)3.31
3.5L GTDI
16000 lb (7167 kg)3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
6
3.55
14300 lb (6486 kg)3.31
5.0L TiVCTSuper Cab – 163
14500 lb (6577 kg)3.55
16200 lb (7348 kg)3.73
16200 lb (7348 kg)
5
3.73
267
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x4
1
Maximum GCWR
2, 3
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheelbase
(inches)
16200 lb (7348 kg)3.31
3.5L GTDI
16200 lb (7348 kg)3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
6
3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
5, 6
3.73
12200 lb (5534 kg)3.733.5L TiVCT
Crew cab – 145
12800 lb (5806 kg)3.55
2.7L GTDI
13300 lb (6033 kg)3.73
13300 lb (6033 kg)
4
3.73
13500 lb (6123 kg)
7
3.31
5.0L TiVCT
14300 lb (6486 kg)
14000 lb (6350 kg)
7
3.55
14400 lb (6532 kg)
16200 lb (7348 kg)3.73
16100 lb (7303 kg)3.31
3.5L GTDI 16100 lb (7303 kg)3.55
16900 lb (7666 kg)3.55
13500 lb (6123 kg)
7
3.31
5.0L TiVCT
Crew cab – 157
14300 lb (6486 kg)
14000 lb (6350 kg)
7
3.55
14500 lb (6577 kg)
16200 lb (7348 kg)3.73
16200 lb (7348 kg)
5
3.73
16100 lb (7303 kg)3.313.5L GTDI
268
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x4
1
Maximum GCWR
2, 3
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheelbase
(inches)
16100 lb (7303 kg)3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
6
3.55
17100 lb (7756 kg)
5, 6
3.73
1
Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5100 pounds (2313 kilograms) unless the vehicle is
equipped with the Heavy Duty Trailer Tow package or the MAX Trailer Tow package.
2
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
3
Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise).
4
2.7L EcoBoost Payload Package.
5
Heavy Duty Payload Package.
6
MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package.
7
Sport package.
Calculating the Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined weight
rating for your vehicle model and axle
ratio. See the previous charts.
2. Subtract all of the following that apply
to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, for example a
draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing hardware.
• Driver weight.
• Passenger(s) weight.
• Payload, cargo and luggage weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded trailer
weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is considered
part of the payload for your vehicle. Reduce
the total payload by the final trailer tongue
weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer to
determine the maximum trailer weight
allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
269
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
See Load limits in the Load Carrying
chapter for load specification terms found
on the tire label and Safety Compliance
label and instructions on calculating your
vehicle's load.
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector
E193232
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop
lamp
Green
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You
must distribute the load in your trailer so
that 10-15% of the total weight of the
trailer is on the tongue.
Weight-distributing Hitches
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than
it was before attaching the trailer. Doing
so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
270
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
a quarter the way down from H2,
toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
frame or hook retainers of your vehicle
hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The Ford trailer brake controller has
been verified to be compatible with
trailers having electric-actuated
drum brakes (one to four axles) and
electric-over-hydraulic brakes. It will not
activate hydraulic surge-style trailer
brakes. It is the responsibility of the
customer to ensure that the trailer brakes
are adjusted appropriately, functioning
normally and all electric connections are
properly made. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious
injury.
271
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
E183395
When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
You can adjust the level of initial trailer
brake output by selecting one of three
settings using the information display.
Choose Low, Medium or High for the initial
trailer brake output you require. See
Information Displays (page 108).
The controller user interface consists of
the following:
A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Pressing these buttons adjusts the
controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
braking). The gain setting displays in the
message center.
The controller shows gain setting, output
bar graph, and trailer connectivity status
in the information display. They appear in
the information display as follows:
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without
trailer connected): Shows the current
gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control
lever or make gain adjustments with
no trailer connected.
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output:
Displays when you push your vehicle's
brake pedal, or upon use of the manual
control. Bar indicators illuminate in the
information display to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer
brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates
the least amount of output; six bars
indicate maximum output.
• Trailer Connected: Displays when the
system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection (a trailer with electric trailer
brakes) during a given ignition cycle.
• Trailer Disconnected: Displays,
accompanied by a single audible time,
when the system senses a trailer
connection and then a disconnection,
either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle. It also
displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear
disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control
lever without a trailer connected. After
disconnecting the trailer connector,
press the brake pedal for
approximately five seconds to allow
the system to detect and update the
trailer status.
272
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to turn on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for
adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the
manual control while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever illuminates both the trailer brake
lamps and your vehicle brake lamps
except the center high-mount stop
lamp, if you make the proper electrical
connection to the trailer. Pressing your
vehicle brake pedal also illuminates
both trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake
Controller Mode
Select the correct option using the
information display. Choose electric for
trailers with electromagentic drum brakes
or EOH for trailers with electric over
hydraulic brake systems. See Information
Displays (page 108).
Trailer Brake Effort Setting
The trailer brake controller allows the user
to customize how aggressively the trailer
brakes engage. The default value is "Low"
and is the recommended setting for most
trailers. If your trailer's brakes require more
initial voltage, or if you prefer more
aggressive trailer braking, then select either
the "Medium" or the "High" setting.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
message confirming connection
appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.
273
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Explanation of Information Display
Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your Ford warranty does not cover
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
A message indicating a trailer brake
module fault may display in response to
faults sensed by the trailer brake controller,
accompanied by a single tone. If this
message appears, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis
and repair. The controller may still
function, but performance may be
degraded.
A message indicating a trailer wiring fault
may display when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If this
message displays, accompanied by a
single tone, with no trailer connected, the
problem is with your vehicle wiring
between the trailer brake controller and
the 7-pin connector at the bumper. If the
message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
• Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather and
trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from when the gain was initially
set.
• Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
• The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
• Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brakes whether you attach a
trailer or not.
• When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down. The
controller module and display turn on
when you switch the ignition on.
• The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. Ford is not responsible for
warranty or performance of the
controller due to misuse or customer
installation.
274
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Using a Step Bumper (If Equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an
integral hitch and only requires a ball with
a one-inch (25.4 millimeter) shank
diameter. The bumper has a 5000-pound
(2268 kilogram) trailer weight and a
500-pound (227 kilogram) tongue weight
capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the hitch ball
position, you must install a frame-mounted
trailer hitch.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant (if the axle is not already
filled with it). See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
275
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
"temporary" spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type
(All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a
different manufacturer than the road tires
on your vehicle. Consult information on the
tire label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above
the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TOWING POINTS
WARNINGS
Using recovery hooks is dangerous
and should only be done by a person
familiar with proper vehicle recovery
safety practices. Improper use of recovery
hooks may cause hook failure or separation
from the vehicle and could result in serious
injury or death.
Always slowly remove the slack from
the recovery strap prior to pulling.
Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can cause
the recovery hooks to break off, or the
recovery strap to fail which can cause
serious injury or death.
Never link two straps together with
a clevis pin. These heavy metal
objects could become projectiles if
the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
applied to them greater than the gross
vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
276
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
277
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in position N. If
you cannot move the transmission into
N, you may need to override it. See
Transmission (page 182).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 139).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, such as towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles
You cannot tow a two-wheel drive vehicle
with any wheels on the ground as vehicle
or transmission damage may occur. You
must tow your vehicle with all four wheels
off the ground, such as when using a
car-hauling trailer.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles
You can only tow a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels on the ground by
placing the transfer case in its neutral
position and engaging the
four-wheel-down towing feature. Perform
the steps outlined in the following section
after positioning your vehicle behind the
tow vehicle and properly securing them
together.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Four-wheel-down Towing
1. Put the ignition in the on position, but
do not start the engine. If your vehicle
has an ignition key, turn the key to on.
If your vehicle has intelligent access,
press the engine START/STOP button
once without pressing the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch to
2H.
4. Shift the transmission to position N.
5. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch
from 2H to 4L and back to 2H five
times within seven seconds.
278
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows NEUTRAL TOW
LEAVE IN N or NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED
LEAVE TRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL.
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to
tow with all wheels on the ground.
Note: If you do not see the message in the
display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
This is normal.
6. Leave the transmission in position N
and turn the ignition as far as it will go
toward the off position (it will not turn
fully off when the transmission is in
position N). If your vehicle has an
ignition key, you must leave the key in
the ignition while towing. To lock and
unlock your vehicle, use the keyless
entry keypad or extra set of keys. If your
vehicle has intelligent access, press the
engine START/STOP button once
without pressing the brake pedal. You
do not need to leave your keys in the
vehicle. You can lock and unlock your
vehicle as you normally do.
7. Release the brake pedal.
WARNINGS
Do not disconnect the battery during
recreational towing. Doing so will
prevent the transfer case from
shifting properly and may cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is in P
(Park).
Shifting the transfer case to its
neutral position for recreational
towing may cause the vehicle to be
able to roll even if the transmission is in P
(Park). The driver or others could be
injured. Make sure the foot brake is
depressed and the vehicle is in a secure
and safe position while the transfer case
is being shifted to its neutral position.
WARNINGS
Failing to put the transfer case in its
neutral position will damage vehicle
components.
Note: You can check four-wheel-down
towing status at any time by opening the
driver's door or turning the ignition to the
accessory or on position and verifying the
NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED message
displays in the cluster.
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return
the transfer case to its 2H position:
1. With your vehicle still properly secured
to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in
the on position, but do not start the
engine. If your vehicle has an ignition
key, turn the key to on. If your vehicle
has intelligent access, press the engine
START/STOP button once without
pressing the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission out of N and into
any gear.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 4X2, and
NEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.
Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
Note: If SHIFT DELAY PULL FORWARD
displays in the instrument cluster, transfer
case gear tooth blockage is present. See the
instructions after this section.
5. Apply the parking brake, and then
disconnect the vehicle from the tow
vehicle.
279
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
6. Release the parking brake, start the
engine, and shift the transmission to
position D to make sure the transfer
case is out of position N.
7. If the transfer case does not
successfully shift out of position N, set
the parking brake until you can have
your vehicle serviced.
Resolving the SHIFT DELAY PULL
FORWARD Message
If the instrument cluster displays SHIFT
DELAY PULL FORWARD perform the
following:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Put the transmission into position N,
and then start the engine.
3. With the engine running, shift the
transmission to position D and let the
vehicle roll forward, up to 3 feet (1
meter). You may hear an audible noise
as the transfer case shifts out of its
neutral position. This is normal.
4. Make sure the instrument cluster
displays NEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.
280
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
• Revving the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
• Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
281
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
• Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
282
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
SNOWPLOWING
We recommend the four-wheel drive F-150
in XL, XLT or Lariat trim levels with the 5.0L
engine and snowplow option for residential
snowplowing only. We do not recommend
the F-150 with the automatic four-wheel
drive system for snowplowing.
Do not use F-150 vehicles equipped with
the 2.7L or 3.5L engines for snowplowing.
Installing the Snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting
and installing the snowplow are in the Ford
Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
snowplow section, found at
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas.
A typical installation affects the following:
• Certification to government safety laws
such as occupant protection and airbag
deployment, braking, and lighting. Look
for an Alterer’s Label on your vehicle
from the snowplow installer certifying
that the installation meets all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS).
• The Front Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) is on the upper left side of the
vehicle’s Safety Compliance
Certification Label. This is the total
weight that front axle supports, which
includes the vehicle weight plus any
auxiliary equipment such as snowplow
frame-mounted hardware that can be
added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford
compliance certification to FMVSS. Do
not exceed FGAWR or Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR).
• Rear ballast weight behind the rear
axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide
front-to-rear weight balance for proper
braking and steering.
• Front wheel toe may require
re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are in
the Ford Workshop Manual.
• Headlight aim may require adjustment.
283
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
• The tire air pressures recommended
for general driving are on the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label. The
maximum cold inflation pressure for
the tire and associated load rating are
on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure
may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the
additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
• Federal and some local regulations
require additional exterior lamps for
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Contact
an authorized dealer for additional
information.
Snowplow Mode (If Equipped)
Press the snowplow button on the
instrument panel to switch on snowplow
mode. The button illuminates when in
snowplow mode. A message appears in
the information display indicating that
features are turned off when in snowplow
mode.
The following features are disabled when
in snowplow mode:
• 110V inverter.
• Fog lamps.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated front and rear seats.
• Massaging seats.
The body module also activates the
snowplow relay that provides power to
aftermarket snowplow controls.
Switch off snowplow mode by pressing
the snowplow button or switching off the
ignition. The snowplow button is no longer
illuminated and features are turned on.
Note: The electrical system is designed to
support the addition of a residential
snowplow (up to 60 Amps continuous) and
snowplow lights (up to 20 Amps
continuous) using snowplow mode. The
system is not designed to support snowplow
usage with additional electrical aftermarket
accessories.
Operating the Vehicle with the
Snowplow Attached
Note: Drive the vehicle at least 500 miles
(800 kilometers) before using your vehicle
for snow removal.
We recommend vehicle speed does not
exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when
snowplowing.
The attached snowplow blade restricts
airflow to the radiator, and may cause the
engine to run at a higher temperature.
Attention to engine temperature is
especially important when outside
temperatures are above freezing. Angle
the blade to maximize airflow to the
radiator and monitor engine temperature
to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Follow the severe duty schedule in your
Scheduled Maintenance information for
engine oil and transmission fluid change
intervals.
Snowplowing with your Airbag
Equipped Vehicle
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) or its fuses.
Contact a Ford or Lincoln dealer.
284
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Additional equipment such as
snowplow equipment may affect the
performance of the airbag sensors
increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to
the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when provided with an airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and
passenger airbag supplemental restraint
system. The supplemental restraint system
activates in certain frontal and offset
frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while
snowplowing, which results in significant
vehicle decelerations, can deploy the
airbag. Such driving also increases the risk
of accidents.
Never remove or defeat the tripping
mechanisms designed into the snow
removal equipment by its manufacturer.
Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle
and the snow removal equipment as well
as possible airbag deployment.
Engine Temperature while Plowing
Your engine may run at a higher
temperature than normal because the
attached snowplow blade restricts airflow
to the radiator:
• If you are driving more than 15 mi
(24 km) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either
full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
• If you are driving less than 15 mi
(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph
(72 km/h) in cold weather, you do not
need to worry about blade position to
provide maximum airflow.
Transmission Operation while
Plowing
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
• Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low)
when plowing in small areas at speeds
below 5.0 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High)
when plowing larger areas or light snow
at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a
forward gear to R (Reverse) until the
engine is at idle and the wheels have
stopped.
Outside Air Temperature While
Plowing
While plowing with your vehicle, the plow
blade can block the sensor airflow and
cause the outside air temperature reading
to be inaccurate.
A Ford wiring kit is available to relocate the
Outside Air Temperature sensor to the
plow blade frame to provide more
accurate outside air temperature readings.
Contact an authorized dealer for more
information.
285
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
286
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
you may contact your dealer, you can call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: The hazard warning flashers will
operate when the ignition is in any position
or if the key is not in the ignition. If used
when the engine is not running, the battery
will lose charge. As a result, there may be
insufficient power to restart your engine.
E142663
The hazard flasher control is
located on the instrument panel
by the radio. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety
hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the flasher control again to turn
them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle is equipped with a
fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the
flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact
will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
287
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
to switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the
engine by pressing the brake pedal and
the START/STOP button, or switch
on the ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without
pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
re-enable the fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
288
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
289
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
290
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
291
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
292
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
293
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
294
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
295
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and
Ford of Canada.
296
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-
index-76.htm (English)
Website
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-
index-76.htm (French)
Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
297
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in
the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 318).
E176315
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—1
Not used.—2
Not used.—3
298
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Telescoping side-view mirror.—4
Rear window defroster.40A*5
Not used.—6
Not used.—7
Telescoping side-view mirror.—8
Not used.—9
Not used.—10
Automatic brake system motor.60A*11
Body control module 1.50A*12
Body control module 2.60A*13
Amplifier.20A**14
4x4.25A**15
Spot light module.10A**16
Heated seat.15A**17
Steering-column lock.10A**18
Power seats.10A**19
Snow plow.15A**20
Rear heated seats.
Not used.—21A
Not used.—21B
Windshield wiper motor.30A*22
Rain sensor.15A*23
Series fan feed.25A*24
Not used.—25
Driver seat motors.30A*26
Passenger power seat.30A*27
Climate controlled seat.30A*28
299
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—29
Air conditioner clutch relay.—30
Not used.—31
Not used.—32
Electric fan 3.50A*33
Trailer tow park lamps.25A*34
Trailer tow stop-turn relay fuse.20A*35
Trailer tow lamps module.25A*36
Electric fan 1.50A*37
Alt A sensor.10A**38
Integrated wheel end solenoid.10A**39
E-locker.15A**40
Telescoping mirror.10A**41
Transmission fluid pump.30A**42
Horn.25A**43
Air conditioner clutch.10A**44
Powertrain control module relay coil.10A**45
Wiper relay coil.10A**46
Not used.—47
Not used.—48
Trailer brake control module.30A*49
Power running boards.30A*50
Fuel pump relay.—51
Not used.—52
Not used.—53
Voltage quality module.30A*54
Body-control-module voltage-quality-
module feed.
300
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Body control module RP2 feed.40A*55
Fuel pump.20A*56
Right-hand EPB actuator.30A*57
Left-hand EPB actuator.30A*58
Starter.30A*59
Blower motor.40A*60
Brake control module.30A*61
Automatic brake system valves.
Power seat relay.—62
Heated mirrors.15A**63
Not used.—64
Starter relay.—65
Powertrain control module relay.—66
Windshield wiper relay.—67
Blower motor relay.—68
Power sliding back window relay.—69
Electric fan 1 relay.—70
Not used.—71
4x4.25A*72
Not used.—73
PDRG motor.30A*74
Horn relay.—75
Not used.—76
Steering column lock relay.—77
Not used.—78
Trailer tow parking lamp relay.—79
Rear window defroster relay.—80
301
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—81
PDRG close relay.—82
Not used.—83
Not used.—84
Not used.—85
Not used.—86
Trailer tow backup lamps.10A**87
Not used.—88
Cigar lighter power point 1.20A*89
Power point 2.20A*90
Power point 3.20A*91
Power point 4.20A*92
GTDI vehicle power 1.25A**93
PFI vehicle power 1.10A**
Not used.—94
Vehicle power 2.25A**95
Not used.—96
Vehicle power 3.10A**97
Not used.—98
Vehicle power 4 (PFI).20A**99
Vehicle power 4 (GTDI).15A**
Not used.—100
Not used.—101
Snow plow relay.—102
Not used.—103
Electic fan 3 relay.—104
Power steering.10A**105
302
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—106
Anti-lock brakes.10A**107
Not used.—108
Powertrain control module.10A**109
4x4 run/start.10A**110
Adaptive cruise control.
Transmission pump run-start.10A**111
Not used.—112
Blind spot information system.7.5A**113
Rear view camera.
Front view camera.
Voltage quality module.
Electric fan 2 relay.—114
Not used.—115
Not used.—116
*Cartridge fuses
**Mini fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is in the right-hand side of
the passenger footwell behind a trim panel.
To remove the trim panel, pull it toward
you and swing it away from the side. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooves
on the panel, and then push it shut.
To remove the fuse panel cover, press in
the tabs on both sides of the cover, and
then pull it off.
To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place the
top part of the cover on the fuse panel and
push the bottom part until it latches.
Gently pull on the cover to make sure it has
latched properly.
303
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuses
E145984
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Demand lamp relay.10A1
Power seats relay.
Glove box.
Vanity lamps.
Overhead console.
Dome.
Courtesy.
Map lamps.
Memory module logic.7.5A2
Memory seat switches.
Lumbar motor.
Driver door lock motor.20A3
Trailer brake control.5A4
Not used.20A5
Not used.10A6
Not used.10A7
Not used.10A8
Not used.10A9
304
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used (spare).5A10
Combined sensor module.5A11
Climate head module.7.5A12
Smart datalink converter.
Cluster.7.5A13
SCCM.
Brake.10A14
Smart datalink converter.10A15
Tailgate release.15A16
HUD.5A17
Ignition switch and passive-entry passive-
start start stop switch.
5A18
Key inhibit solenoid.
Tow haul (O/D) cancel for floor or column
shifter.
7.5A19
Not used.7.5A20
HUD.5A21
In car temperature with humidity sensor.
EPB.5A22
Power seat.
PDRG switch.10A23
Inverter.
Driver side window.
Moonroof.
Vista roof.
Central lock/unlock.20A24
Driver door control module.30A25
Passenger door control module.30A26
Vista roof.30A27
Moonroof.
Not used.20A28
Not used.30A29
305
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.30A30
Adjustable pedal switch and motor.15A31
Multi-function display.10A32
Global position system.
Sync 1.
Sync 2.
Radio frequency receiver.
Radio.20A33
Run-start relay.30A34
Restraints module.5A35
360 camera module.15A36
Heated steering wheel module.
Rear-view mirror.
Rear heated seats.
Power distribution box run-start fuses.20A37
Rear window switches and motors.30A Circuit breaker.38
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
You must replace a failed fuse with
one that has the specified amperage
rating. If you use a fuse with a higher
amperage rating, you may cause severe
wire damage and may start a fire.
E142430
A fuse may fail if electrical components in
the vehicle are not properly working. A
broken wire inside the fuse indicates a
failed fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
306
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left hand side
of the instrument panel.
E166491
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
locate the secondary release lever
under the front of the hood near the
center of your vehicle.
307
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
E190266
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders
hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is closed properly and fully
latched.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
2.7L EcoBoost
E176046
308
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 298).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 318).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 312).C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 312).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 318).E.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 329).F.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 313).G.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 318).H.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
A
A
B D E F
C
GH
E166496
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 318).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 318).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 312).C.
309
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 312).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 318).E.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 313).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 329).G.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 298).H.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L
E176214
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 298).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 318).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 312).C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 312).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 318).E.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 329).F.
310
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 313).G.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 318).H.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 5.0L
E166494
AA AB AC AD AE AF
AAAGAAAH
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 318).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 318).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 312).C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 312).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 318).E.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 313).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 329).G.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 298).H.
311
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E161560
A B
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the
gearshift is in park (P).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from
engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine
oil level dipstick. See Under Hood
Overview (page 310).
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the
dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is between the lower
and upper holes, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the lower
hole, add enough oil to raise the
level within the lower and upper
holes.
• Oil levels above the upper hole may
cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine
by an authorized dealer.
7. Put the oil level dipstick back into the
oil dipstick tube and ensure it is fully
seated.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level
dipstick when the engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
312
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that
meets Ford specifications. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
370).
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and
use a funnel to pour the engine oil into
the opening.
4. Wipe off any spilled oil.
5. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure
the oil level is not above the normal
operating range on the engine oil level
dipstick.
6. Install the engine oil level dipstick and
ensure it is fully seated.
7. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by
turning the filler cap clockwise until
three clicks are heard or until the cap
is fully seated.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 453).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant
and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do
not recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
313
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Your warranty may not
cover these damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. Use prediluted engine coolant
meeting the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
370). The use of an incorrect coolant may
harm the engine or cooling system
components and may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system
with Motorcraft Premium Cooling
System Flush.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
will escape as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
370).
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant as an approved recycling
process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed
of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
314
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% decrease
the overheat protection characteristics
of the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40%
provides improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before you incur
incremental component damage. The
fail-safe distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to
the red (hot) area and:
the coolant temperature warning
light will illuminate
the service engine soon indicator
will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• This will disable the air conditioning
system.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start your engine. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
315
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine will
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized
dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the fluid temperatures reduce.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because
of the added load, your vehicle’s engine
may temporarily reach higher
temperatures during severe operating
conditions such as ascending a long or
steep grade while pulling a trailer in high
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine
coolant temperature gauge needle move
toward the H and the POWER REDUCED
TO LOWER TEMP message may appear
in the information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power.
In order to manage the engine fluid
temperatures, your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
many factors such as vehicle loading,
towing, grade and ambient temperature.
If this occurs, there is no need to pull off
the road. You can continue to drive your
vehicle while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When
the engine coolant temperature decreases
to a normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
engine soon messages appear in your
information display:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
P.
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the red (hot) area.
After several minutes, if the
temperature does not drop, follow the
remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, restart
your engine and continue.
316
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and
restart the engine. See Adding Engine
Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling
Works in this chapter for more
information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 453).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission
does not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CHECK
E170444
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug.
3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level
should be within 0.12 in (3 mm) from
the bottom of the hole.
4. Add fluid through the filler hole.
Use only fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).
317
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating range;
there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid
levels are outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
318
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
This vehicle may be fitted with more
than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery
does not disconnect your vehicle electrical
system. Make sure you disconnect the
battery cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required,
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
cover or shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 392). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 92).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 392).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
319
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery
protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
320
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
E205141
2
3
4
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
3. Press the wiper blade secondary
locking clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident,
contact an authorized dealer to check and
realign your headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
321
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0
millimeter circle on the lens) to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.
E167358
4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On
the wall or screen you will observe a
light pattern with a distinct horizontal
edge toward the right. If this edge is not
at the horizontal reference line, you will
need to adjust the beam so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal
reference line.
E163806
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips
screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s
reach. Grasp the bulb only by its
plastic base and do not touch the glass.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps
are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before
installing it.
322
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to
accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a thin film of
mist can form on the interior of the lens.
The thin mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or
streaks present on the interior of the
lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if
any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Accessing the Halogen High Beam,
Low Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs
1. Rotate the steering wheel to the
opposite side of the bulb needing
replacement.
2. Remove two screws and one push pin
from the front of the wheel liner.
E183762
3. Pull the wheel liner back towards the
tire to gain access to the bulbs.
323
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Replacing the Halogen High Beam,
Low Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs
E183500
Low beam headlamp bulb.A.
Direction indicator bulb.B.
High beam headlamp bulb.C.
E183763
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. For the high beam and low beam bulbs,
remove the rubber cap to access the
bulbs.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it straight
out.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical
connector.
5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
324
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Replacing Side Marker Bulb
E183764
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. With the hood open, locate the side
marker on the top of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it straight
out.
4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
E163826
1. Make sure the fog lamps are off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it from the fog lamp.
4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs (If
Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Replacing LED Direction Indicator
and Side Marker Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Replacing Brake, Rear, Direction
Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Open the tailgate to access the rear
lamp assemblies
E187288
3. Remove the two bolts from the tail
lamp assembly. Then, carefully pull the
lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar
by releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
325
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
E187289
Brake, rear and direction
indicator bulb.
A.
Reverse lamp bulb.B.
1. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from
the rear lamp assembly.
2. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing LED Brake, Rear,
Direction Indicator and Reverse
Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Replacing Cargo Lamp and High-
mount Brake Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the lamps are off.
2. Remove the four screws and move the
lamp assembly away from the vehicle
to expose the bulb sockets.
E187290
3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it
counterclockwise and pulling it out of
the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, Spot
Lamp and High-mount Brake Lamp
Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
Bulb
Note: The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper.
E187794
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
326
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise
and carefully pull to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Exterior Mounted Mirror
Direction Indicator Lamp Bulbs
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
21/5W7444NAFront direction indicator and parking lamps.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.
65W9005Headlamp high beam.
55WH11Headlamp low beam.
55W9140Front fog lamps.
5WW5WFront side marker lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
LEDLEDPuddle lamp.
27/8W3157Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator
and rear side marker lamps.
*
16W921
Central high mounted brake lamp.
*
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp. Vehicles with
cargo box.
27W3156KReversing lamps.
5W168License plate lamp.
*
May have optional LED lamps.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
327
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDGlove compartment lamp.
LEDLEDMap lamp.
LEDLEDRear dome and courtesy lamps.
LEDLEDRear cargo box lamps.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
328
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do not
allow foreign material to enter the air
induction system. The engine is susceptible
to damage from even small particles.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
370).
Change the air filter element at the proper
intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 453).
E191820
x2
1. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter cover to the housing.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Install in the reverse order.
329
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
ZC-42
-Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
ZC-15
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash
ZC-3-A
-Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.)
ZC-20 (U.S.)
-Engine Shampoo
-Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner
ZC-56
-Multi-Purpose Cleaner
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner
ZC-54
-Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.)
ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)
ZC-23 (U.S.)
-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner
ZC-37-A
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
330
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
331
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
332
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp, white cotton
cloth, then use a clean and dry white
cotton cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands
clean if you have been in contact with
certain products such as insect
repellent and suntan lotion in order to
avoid possible damage to the interior
painted surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners
as these may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Damage may not be covered by your
warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
white, cotton cloth.
333
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,
white cotton cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, use a mild soap and water
solution. If the spot cannot be
completely cleaned by this method,
the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning
product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, white, cotton cloth and press
the cloth onto the soiled area. Allow
this to set at room temperature for 30
minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not
soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the
area by using a rubbing motion for 60
seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a
clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Without King Ranch Edition
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing spots and stains
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft
Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
With King Ranch Edition
Your vehicle has seating covered in
premium, top-grain leather that is
extremely durable, but still requires special
care and maintenance in order to preserve
longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning
maintains the appearance of the leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a
clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
and water solution.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather as
cleaners may darken the leather.
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,
orange juice or oil-based products on
the leather as they may permanently
stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning
products, alcohol solutions, solvents
or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
or plastics.
334
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Scratches
Because the leather in the seat comes
from genuine steer hides, there may be
evidence of naturally occurring markings,
such as small scars. These markings give
character to the seating covers and are
considered to be proof of a genuine leather
product.
In order to lessen the appearance of
certain scratches and other wear marks,
apply conditioner on the affected area
following the same instructions as in the
Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner
are available at the King Ranch Saddle
Shop. Visit the website at
www.krsaddleshop.com, or call
1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United
States. If you are unable to obtain King
Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another
premium leather conditioner.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps
outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Make sure the leather is dry then apply
a nickel-sized amount of conditioner
to a clean, dry cloth.
• Rub the conditioner into the leather
until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry, then repeat the
process for the entire interior. If a film
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
cloth.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS (If Equipped)
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
335
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
336
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
337
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
the conditions, keep tires properly inflated,
never overload or improperly load your
vehicle, and make sure every passenger is
properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts, and
children and infants must use appropriate
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
ejection.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-wheel drive system (if
equipped)
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
(when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
On some four-wheel drive models, the
initial shift from two-wheel drive to
four-wheel drive while the vehicle is
moving can cause a momentary clunk and
ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal
as the front drivetrain comes up to speed
and are not cause for concern.
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
338
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145299
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition. These differences that
make your vehicle so versatile also make
it handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
339
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
340
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-Metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tire
size and for Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
341
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
342
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
343
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph
(299 km/h), tire manufacturers
always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent
the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear
grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100.
344
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
345
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
346
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
See Load Carrying (page 241).
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
347
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at
the levels specified by Ford, your
vehicle may experience a condition
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
severe vibration and oscillation in
the steering wheel after the vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road that does not dampen out by
itself. Shimmy may result from
significant under-inflation of the
tires, improper tires (load range,
size, or type), or vehicle
modifications such as lift-kits. In
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting
off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
will cease as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
348
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size
and dissimilar spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description. Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
349
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
350
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
the Tire Label. If this information
is not found on these labels then
you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
351
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
WARNINGS
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.6 m) away from the wheel and
tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
For a mounting pressure more
than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the
person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.6 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels are not designed to
be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
352
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud, or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
353
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
WARNING
If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle
is equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system, then the
settings for the system sensors
need to be updated. Always
perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If the
system is not reset, it may not
provide a low tire pressure
warning when necessary. See the
tire pressure monitoring system
reset procedure in this chapter.
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram)
E142548
354
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only cable type chains or chains
offered by Ford/Lincoln as an
accessory or equivalent. Other
conventional link type chains may
contact and cause damage to the
vehicle's wheel house and/or body.
• Do not install chains on the front tires
as this may interfere with suspension
components.
• Only certain snow cables or chains
have been approved by Ford/Lincoln
as safe for use on your vehicle with the
following tires: 245/70R17,
LT245/70R17, 265/70R17 and
265/60R18.
• You should install snow cables or
chains that have been rated as SAE
Class S.
• Install chains securely, verifying that
the chains do not touch any wiring,
brake lines, or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or
less if recommended by the chain
manufacturer while using snow chains.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions. The snow
chains or cables must be mounted in
pairs on the rear tires only.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
Ford/Lincoln authorized dealer.
355
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking the tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire pressure
gauge. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
356
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference.
• This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
357
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire Care (page 340).
Tire rotation without
sensor training
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
358
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure.
If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the
tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
WARNING
To determine the required
pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation on vehicles that require
different recommended tire pressures in the
front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle's load carrying
capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front
tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
pressure monitoring system equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
low tire pressure warning light at two
different pressures; one for the front tires
and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
consistent performance and maximum tire
life, the tire pressure monitoring system
needs to know when the tires are rotated
to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this
information, the system can detect and
properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
359
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the
system reset procedure at least three
feet (one meter) away from another
Ford Motor Company vehicle
undergoing the system reset procedure
at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or
the system will time-out and the entire
procedure will have to be repeated on
all four wheels.
• A double horn will sound indicating the
need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
Read the entire procedure before
attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32
km/h) for at least two minutes, then
park in a safe location where you can
easily get to all four tires and have
access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position
with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times. You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode
has been entered successfully, the horn
will sound once, the system indicator
will flash and a message is shown in
the information display. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at Step
2. If after repeated attempts to enter
the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the system indicator does not
flash and no message is shown in the
information display, seek service from
your authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors in the tires using the
following system reset sequence
starting with the left front tire in the
following clockwise order: Left front
(driver's side front tire), Right front
(passenger's side front tire), Right rear
(passenger's side rear tire), Left rear
(driver's side rear tire).
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
double horn is heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained (driver's
side rear tire), the system indicator
stops flashing, and a message is shown
in the information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must
repeat it. If after repeating the
procedure and two short beeps are
heard when the ignition is turned to
off, seek assistance from your
authorized dealer.
360
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating position)
or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 356).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
system sensors See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 356). Replace
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY
361
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and
Tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper. The jack,
jack handle and lug wrench are located in
the following locations:
LocationBody style
Attached to the floor behind the passenger
seat (for easier access, move the passenger
seat forward)
Regular Cab
Attached behind the rear seat on the
passenger side
Super Cab and Crew Cab
362
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack.
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P), set the parking brake and block (in
both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
WARNINGS
Disable the power running boards
before jacking, lifting, or placing any
object under the vehicle. Never place
your hand between the power running
board and the vehicle as extended power
running boards will retract when the doors
are closed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
when using the spare tire carrier
could cause loss of the wheel and
tire and lead to personal injury: Only use
the spare tire carrier to stow the tire and
wheel combination specified on the Tire
Label or Safety Compliance Certification
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Other tire and wheel
combinations could cause the carrier to
fail if it does not fit securely or is too heavy.
Do not use impact tools or power tools
operating over 200 RPM, which may cause
winch malfunction and prevent a secure
fit. Override the winch at least three times
(there will be an audible click each time)
to ensure a tight secure fit of the wheel and
tire.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard
flashers and set the parking brake. Then,
place the transmission in park (P) and turn
the engine off.
363
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Removing the Jack and Tools
E206264
1. From the passenger side of the vehicle,
unstrap the large center strap securing
the jacking kit to the floor posts.
2. Remove the fuel funnel.
3. With slight downward pressure, slide
the jacking kit outward, toward the
passenger side of the vehicle.
4. Lift the jacking kit off the floor posts.
Removing the Spare Tire
E188735
364
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
1. Use your key to remove the lock
cylinder from the access hole of the
bumper to allow access to the guide
tube. Assemble the jack handle as
shown in the illustration.
E184020
2. Fully insert the jack handle through the
bumper hole and into the guide tube
through the access hole in the rear
bumper.
3. Turn the handle counterclockwise until
the tire is lowered to the ground, the
tire can be slid rearward and the cable
is slightly slack.
4. Remove the retainer from the center
of the wheel.
E175447
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.
For example, if the left front tire is flat,
block the right rear wheel.
6. Obtain the spare tire and jack from
their storage locations.
7. Loosen each wheel lug nut on the
affected flat tire one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them.
Jacking the Vehicle
Front Jacking Points
E183709
Note: Use the frame rail as the jacking
location point, not the control arm. The
frame rail is marked with an arrow.
365
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Rear Jacking Points
E183403
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
1. Place the jack at the jacking point next
to the tire you are changing. Turn the
jack handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.
2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 369).
6. Stow the flat tire. See the Stowing the
Flat or Spare Tire.
7. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make
sure the jack is fastened securely
before you drive. See Stowing the Jack
and Tools.
8. Unblock the wheels.
E166719
1
3
5
4
6
2
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
Note: Failure to follow the spare tire
stowage instructions may result in failure of
the cable or loss of the spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. Pull on the cable to
align the components at the end of the
cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The effort to
turn the jack handle increases
significantly and the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips when the tire is raised
to the maximum tightness. Tighten to
366
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
the best of your ability, to the point
where the ratchet or slip occurs, if
possible. The spare tire carrier will not
allow you to overtighten. If the spare
tire carrier ratchets or slips with little
effort, contact your authorized dealer.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the
frame and is properly tightened. Try to
push or pull, then turn the tire to be
sure it will not move. Loosen and
retighten, if necessary. Failure to
properly stow the spare tire may result
in failure of the winch cable and loss
of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure
when servicing the spare tire pressure
(every six months, as per your
scheduled maintenance information),
or at any time that the spare tire is
disturbed through service of other
components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock
into the bumper drive tube with the
spare tire lock key and jack handle.
Stowing the Jack and Tools
1. Place the jacking tools in the tool bag
and secure the velcro flaps.
E184021
2. Adjust the jack up or down by rotating
the lead screw located on the end of
the jack. The stowage markings should
line up with the bottom channel.
3. Place the jack in the vehicle so that the
lead screw adjustment is facing the
driver side of the vehicle.
4. Place the tool bag on top of the jack.
The jack base fits within the opening
of the jack tool bag.
5. Attach the flap around the lead screw
and secure the flap to the velcro.
6. Secure the two D-ring straps tightly.
7. Secure the velcro straps through the
hole of the lead screw tightly.
8. Place the jack so the lug wrench faces
the rear of the vehicle. Position the jack
base so the key hole slots align with
the jacking posts.
367
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E184022
9. With slight downward pressure, slide
the jack and tool assembly toward the
driver side of the vehicle until it stops.
10. Secure the large strap.
11. Clip the fuel funnel back in place.
368
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
369
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
5.0L V83.5L V6 TiVCT3.5L V6 Ecoboost2.7L EcoBoostEngine
302214214164Cubic inches
Minimum 87
octane or E85
Minimum 87
octane or E85
Minimum 87
octane
Minimum 87
octane
Required
fuel
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-81-4-2-5-3-61-4-2-5-3-61-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugCoil on plugCoil on plugCoil on plugIgnition
system
.049-.053 in.
(1.25 - 1.35 mm)
.049-.053 in.
(1.25 - 1.35 mm)
.030-.033 in.
(0.75 - 0.85 mm)
.028-.031 (0.7 -
0.8 mm)
Spark plug
gap
10.5:110.8:110.0:110.0:1Compres-
sion ratio
Drivebelt Routing
2.7L Ecoboost Engines with A/C
E176088
3.5L V6 Engines with A/C
E167467
5.0L V8 Engines with A/C
E167465
370
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
5.0L V83.5L V6 TiVCT3.5L V6
Ecoboost
2.7L EcoboostComponent
FA-1883FA-1883FA-1883FA-1883Air filter
element
FL-500-SFL-500-SFL-500-SFL-2062Oil filter
BXT-48H6-610BXT-48H6-610BXT-48H6-610BAGM-48H6-
760
Battery
BXT-94RH7-
730
BXT-94RH7-
730
BXT-94RH7-730
(King Ranch,
Lariat and
Premium)
BAGM-94RH7-
800
(King Ranch,
Lariat and
Premium)
(King Ranch,
Lariat and
Premium)
(King Ranch,
Lariat and
Premium)
SP-519SP-520SP-534SP-542Spark plugs
WW-2242Windshield
wiper blade
FP-79Cabin air filter
We recommend Motorcraft replacement
parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance.
These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are
engineered for your vehicle. Use of other
parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty
may be void for any damage related to use
of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use
an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification
SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 453).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
371
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
372
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80E
373
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
16.4 qt (15.5 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive)
5.5 pt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid
13.1 qt (12.4 L)Automatic transmission fluid*
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Fuel tank
36.0 gal (136.2 L)Fuel tank
(Optional)
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)A/C Refrigerant
3.4 fl oz (100.5 ml)A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
374
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
MXY-80W90-QL
375
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear
Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly) (U.S.
and Mexico):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly)
(Canada):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
CXL-12
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (U.S. and
Mexico): MERCON LV
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
376
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
377
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
15.6 qt (14.75 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive)
5.5 pt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid
13.1 qt (12.4 L)Automatic transmission fluid*
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly)
378
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Fuel tank
36.0 gal (136.2 L)Fuel tank
(Optional)
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)A/C Refrigerant
3.4 fl oz (100.5 ml)A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
379
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
MXY-80W90-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear
Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly) (U.S.
and Mexico):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly)
(Canada):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
CXL-12
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (U.S. and
Mexico): MERCON LV
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (Canada):
380
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
381
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
382
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
6.3 qt (6 L)Engine oil
15.1 qt (14.25 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive)
5.5 pt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid
13.1 qt (12.4 L)Automatic transmission fluid*
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Fuel tank
36.0 gal (136.2 L)Fuel tank
(Optional)
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)A/C Refrigerant
3.4 fl oz (100.5 ml)A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
383
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
MXY-80W90-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear
Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
384
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly) (U.S.
and Mexico):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly)
(Canada):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
CXL-12
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (U.S. and
Mexico): MERCON LV
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
385
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S. and Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
386
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
7.7 qt (7.3 L)Engine oil
15.9 qt (15 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive)
5.5 pt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid
13.1 qt (12.4 L)Automatic transmission fluid*
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Fuel tank
36.0 gal (136.2 L)Fuel tank
(Optional)
387
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)A/C Refrigerant
3.4 fl oz (100.5 ml)A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
388
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
MXY-80W90-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear
Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly) (U.S.
and Mexico):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly)
(Canada):
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
CXL-12
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (U.S. and
Mexico): MERCON LV
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Torque On Demand) (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
389
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
390
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
391
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
392
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Your audio system may not be
equipped with a CD player.
393
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
E176101
Display screen: View audio and SYNC options.A
Number block: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune
to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
B
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode).
C
Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
D
Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.E
Seek: Select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system stops at
the first station up or down the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the next strong radio station or memory preset.
F
VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
G
394
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
H
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.I
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
J
Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and minutes.
K
You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock
Settings.
Mute: Press this button to mute the playing media.L
Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
M
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
395
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
E176104
Display screen: View audio and SYNC options.A
Number block:B
In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to any
station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons
to enter a phone number.
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
C
Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
D
Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.E
Seek:F
396
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system
stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the next strong radio station or memory preset.
In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button
to move quickly forward through the current track.
CD slot: Insert a CD.G
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.H
VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
I
MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
J
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.K
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
L
Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and minutes.
M
You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock
Settings.
CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
N
Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
O
397
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/SYNC
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E176102
Display screen: View audio and SYNC options.A
Number block:B
In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to any
station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
398
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
In phone mode, press the buttons to dial a phone number.
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode).
C
Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
D
Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.E
Seek: Select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system stops at
the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the
next strong radio station or memory preset.
F
VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
G
PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.
See SYNC™ (page 410).
H
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.I
MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
J
Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and minutes.
K
You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock
Settings.
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
L
Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
M
399
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as Sirius satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
E176103
400
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
Display screen: View audio and SYNC options.A
Number block:B
In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to any
station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
In CD mode, press a button to select a track.
In phone mode, press the buttons to dial a phone number.
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
C
Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
D
Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.E
Seek:F
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system
stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the next strong radio station or memory preset.
In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button
to move quickly forward through the current track.
CD slot: Insert a CD.G
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.H
VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
I
PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.
See SYNC™ (page 410).
J
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.K
MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
L
Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and minutes.
M
You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock
Settings.
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
N
401
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
SIRIUS or MUTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Sirius satellite radio, press
this button to listen to Sirius satellite radio. If your vehicle is not equipped with
Sirius satellite radio, press the button to mute the playing media.
O
CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
P
Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
Q
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The MyFord Touch system controls
most of the audio features.
402
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
E176105
VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
A
Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward:B
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these buttons. The
system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
In CD mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next track.
Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
C
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.D
MEDIA: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM and
Line In.
E
CD slot: Insert a CD.F
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.G
403
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
404
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
405
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
406
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
407
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, you can view this
number by pressing SIRIUS and memory
preset 1 at the same time, or tuning to
channel 0.
Troubleshooting
Possible actionConditionRadio display
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS system
failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Call SIRIUS 1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found. Check Channel
Guide.
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
408
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
USB PORT (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See Using
SYNC™ With Your Media Player (page
431).
MEDIA HUB
The media hub may be located on the
instrument panel or center console.
E207805
See your SYNC information.
409
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist and applications, such
as Spotify and Glympse, via SYNC
AppLink.
*
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected
phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
• Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*
These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
410
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
411
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 426).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
(cancel | exit)
This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
help
This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
(main menu | start again)
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
412
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then either of the following:
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode novice
Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
interaction mode advanced
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then either of the following:
Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts off
Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
confirmation prompts on
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
413
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then any of the following:
When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
phone confirmation on
The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
phone confirmation off
Changing the Voice Settings
In addition to using voice commands to
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display.
To change the voice settings press the
Menu button then select:
Menu Item
SYNC-Settings
Voice settings
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 4000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
414
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
audio display indicates there is no
paired phone, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing
process.
4. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
E142599
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Press the voice and when prompted
say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
Follow the instruc-
tions on the audio
display.
(pair ([Bluetooth]
device | phone |
Bluetooth audio) |
add phone)
You can say any of the voice commands
that appear within open and close brackets
that are separated by |. For example,
where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
what's or what is.
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth
Devices.
4. Press the OK button.
415
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
7. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell
phone options. Your cell phone may also
prompt you to give SYNC permission to
access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your
cell phone’s manual and visit the website.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say any of the
following:
Voice Command
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
Then say any of the following:
call (___)
call ___ at home
call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)
call ___ on (cell | mobile)
call ___ on other
1
dial [[a] number]
2
([go to] privacy | transfer to phone
| privacy on)
Voice Command
2
(hold call [on] | place call on hold)
2
join (calls | call)
2
mute call [on]
2
(mute call off | un-mute call)
(turn ringer on | silent mode off)
(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
3
[text] (messages | message)
help
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Home".
1
See Dial table below.
2
These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
3
See the text message table below.
Dial Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
Voice Commands
411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)
700 (seven hundred)
800 (eight hundred)
900 (nine hundred)
Clear (deletes all entered digits)
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
Number <0-9>
416
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Commands
Plus
Pound (#)
Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press any button on the
audio system.
To access text messages say:
Voice Command
[text] (messages | message)
Then say any of the following:
(listen to | read) ([text] message)
forward (text | [text] message)
reply to (text | [text] message)
call [sender]
Phonebook Hints
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name browse phonebook, select a contact
and press:
Menu Item
Hear it
Changing Devices Using Voice
Commands
Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple
phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch
devices say:
Voice Command
You can state the name of
the desired device, such as
“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy”
or“My iPod”. SYNC may
ask you to confirm the type
of device (Phone, USB, or
Bluetooth Audio).
(connect |
device) ___
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Voice Command
call [[a]
name]
SYNC prompts you to say
the numbers that you wish
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system
confirms it. You can then
say:
dial [[a]
number]
When the system has stated the
number, you say any of the following:
Voice Command
This initiates the call.(dial | send)
This erases the spoken
digits.
(delete |
correct)
To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display.
417
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Receiving Calls
Accepting calls
When receiving a call, you can answer the
call by pressing the accept call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to accept a call
select:
Menu Item
Accept
Rejecting Calls
When receiving a call, you can reject the
call by pressing the reject call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to reject a call select:
Menu Item
Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.
To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
from the following options:
Description and actionMenu Item
Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the
microphone on, select the option again.
Mic. off
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Privacy
Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Hold
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Dial a number
Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
Join calls
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
418
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionMenu Item
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access your call history log.Call History
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.
Description and actionDisplay
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.Dial a number
Access your downloaded phonebook.Phonebook
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.Call History
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
Speed Dial
419
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionDisplay
Send, download and delete text messages.Text messaging
Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
BT Devices
View various settings and features on your phone.Phone settings
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the audio display
indicates you have a new message.
To hear the message you can say:
Description and
action
Voice command
Select this option
to have the system
read the message
to you.
(listen to | read)
([text] message)
Using the screen you also have the following options:
Description and actionMenu
Item
Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
Ignore
Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
View
If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
More...
420
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionMenu
Item
Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Reply to
sender
Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Call sender
Press the OK button to forward the message to
anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
Forward
msg.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select the text messaging option, and
then press the OK button.
Choose from the following options:
Description and actionMenu
Item
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.
New
Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.
View
Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.
Delete
Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.
More...
Sending a Text Message
Note: You can only send a text message to
one recipient at a time.
1. Select the send option when the
desired selection highlights in the audio
display.
2. Select the confirmation option when
the contact appears.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm
when the system asks if you want to
send the message. A pre-defined
signature appears on each text
message.
Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
and selecting the text option from the audio
display or by replying to a received message
in the inbox.
421
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and
adjust features such as your ring tone and
text message notification, modify your
phonebook, and set up automatic
download.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.
Scroll to select from the following options:
Description and actionMenu Item
If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Set as master
See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Phone status
Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
Set ringtone
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.
Text msg notify
Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
Phonebook pref.
422
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Phonebook preferencesMenu Item
Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Add contacts
When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Delete
Press the OK button to select and download your phone-
book to the system.
Download now
When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
Auto-download
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.
Enabling this feature allows you to select how your
contacts are displayed. You can select:
Sorting Pref.
Last/First nameFirst/Last name
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
and then press the OK button.
Select from the following options:
Description and actionMenu Item
Pair additional phones to the system.Add
1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
423
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionMenu Item
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted
to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
screen. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.
Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC
permission to access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s
manual and visit the website.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Delete
The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Master
Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-
tionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Conn.
Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
Discon.
System Settings
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and
then press the OK button.
424
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Scroll to select from the following options:
Description and actionDisplay
Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's
Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Bluetooth on
Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Set defaults
Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Master reset
Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
Install on SYNC
Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
System info
The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 412).
Voice settings
Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
Browse USB
425
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
In order for the following features to work,
your cellular phone must be compatible
with SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications such as
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is
compatible).
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
911 Assist
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 43). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 286).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
426
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the
phone menu then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Press OK to confirm and enter
the 911 Assist menu.
911 Assist
Scroll to activate this option
then press OK when the
desired option appears in the
radio display.
If you choose not to activate this
feature you will have the following
options:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Provides a display and voice
reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start.
Voice
Reminder
ON
Provides a display reminder
only without a voice reminder
at phone connection.
Voice
Reminder
OFF
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
427
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.
Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps
will vary by region.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
Note: AppLink is not available if your
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
system.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the
menu on-screen. Then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
SYNC-Apps
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
select a particular app or
select:
Mobile
Apps
Find New Apps
Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
Accessing an App's Menu
When an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
wheel control to access the app menu.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.
428
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
mobile (apps |
applications)
Use this command to discover the available voice commands.help
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SYNC prompts you to say the name of an
app to start it on SYNC.
mobile (apps | applications)
SYNC lists all of the currently available
mobile apps.
list [mobile] (apps | applications)
Searches your connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications)
help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
429
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
• To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
You can also select a specific app.
If the app supports push notifications, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or disable
the feature as required.
All Apps
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.
430
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
There are three possible statuses:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Update Needed
No update is required.Up-To-Date
The system is trying to receive an update.Updating...
Update settings
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select this option from the settings menu
to manually preform a needed update.
Request Update
Select this option from the settings menu
to disable automatic updates.
Disable Updates
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile
Apps on SYNC.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 15,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod, Zune,
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats,
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Confirm that the USB device has been
formatted correctly and has the following
specifications:
• USB 2.0.
• File format must be FAT16/32.
The format of the audio files on the USB
device must be:
• MP3.
• Non DRM protected WMA.
• WAV.
• AAC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
431
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
You can now play
music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod
| MP3 [player])
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do
not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To Connect Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select
either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media
source list in the audio display.
To view USB content select:
Description and ActionMessage
Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback
audio automatically.
Browse USB
You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Select BROWSE
from the buttons at the bottom of the
audio display and choose from the
following:
Message
Play all
Playlists
Songs
Artists
Message
Albums
Genres
Browse USB
Reset USB
Media Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
432
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and ActionVoice Command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or
"what is playing".
Description and ActionCommand
Pauses device playback.pause
Resumes device playback.play
play [album] ___
Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play all
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
Plays the next track on the current media.next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]
Plays the previous track on current media.previous [track | title | song | file |
podcast | chapter | episode]
Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.
[play] (similar music | more like this)
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
Repeats the current track.repeat (one | track) [on]
433
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and ActionCommand
Plays the current playlist in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle [all] [on]
shuffle off
At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what is
playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(if populated) of the current track.
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
Examples of USB Commands
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
ways to find and play a song using voice.
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
• Play song "Penny Lane".
• Play "Penny Lane".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:
• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
• Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth.
To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the
MEDIA button (next to the audio display)
or Source button, or press the voice button
and when prompted say:
Voice Command
Bluetooth audio
Then any of the following:
Voice Command
pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
434
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
reset the index of your USB devices.
Press the MEDIA button and select either
USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list
in the audio display to start USB playback.
Description and ActionMessage
This will enter the media menu.Options
Then any of the following:
Description and ActionMessage
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Shuffle
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track
You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
Similar music
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
Accessing Your USB Song Library
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the
audio display) to select USB playback.
Description and ActionMessage
This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
Browse USB
435
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media.
If there are media files, you have the following options:
Description and ActionDisplay
Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
in numerical order.
*
Play all
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
or MTP).
*
Playlists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*
Songs
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
*
Artists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Sort all indexed media files by album.
*
Albums
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
*
Genres
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
Browse USB
1. Press the OK button to select.
436
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and ActionDisplay
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and
then press the OK button.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
Using Voice Commands
You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
Accessing and Viewing USB Media
(browse | search | show) all (album |
albums)
(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)
(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres)
(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists)
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
(browse | search | show) album ___
(browse | search | show) artist ___
(browse | search | show) genre ___
(browse | search | show) playlist ___
USB 2 (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.
You can plug in an additional USB device
into the second USB port.
You can access both USB devices by using
voice commands.
To access a USB device press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Voice command
USB 1
USB 2
Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings
You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 414).
437
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Commands for Audio
Sources
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command.
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice Command
(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)
(disc | CD [player]) play
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM 2
Radio
*
tune [to] SAT
*
Sirius
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
Voice Command
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
help
*
If equipped.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button, and then
say any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:
Voice Command
Radio
You can then say any of the following
commands.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
[tune [to]] AM preset ___
[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
438
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Command
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])
[tune [to]] FM preset ___
*
FM ___ HD ___
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
*
HD ___
[tune [to]] preset ___
Tune
help
*
If equipped.
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped)
E142599
To listen to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after
the tone, say:
Voice Commands
Sirius
When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table.
Voice Commands
tune [to] SAT
[tune [to]] SAT 1
[tune [to]] SAT 2
[tune [to]] SAT 3
[tune [to]] preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___
Voice Commands
[tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___
tune [to] [Sirius]
Help
You can say the
channel number (0-
233) to listen to that
Sirius station.
[tune [to]] Sirius
[channel] ___
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button, and then say
any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play
You can then say any of the following
commands.
pause
play
[play] next track
[play] previous track
[play | change to] track [number] ___
repeat (track | song) [on]
repeat folder [on]
repeat off
(shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |
songs) [on]]
439
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Command
(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |
disc) [on]
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]
shuffle off
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
440
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
441
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
442
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
443
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
444
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
AppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
445
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
446
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
447
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through an authorized Ford dealer.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your
accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
• Bed rails.
• Chrome exhaust tips.
• Custom graphics*.
• Hood deflector.
• Running boards.
• Side window deflectors.
• Splash guards.
Interior style
• Ambient lighting.
• Electrochromatic
compass/temperature interior mirror.
• Floor mats.
• Leather-trimmed interior seating*.
Lifestyle
• Bed extender.
• Bedliners and bedmats.
• Bed ramps.
• Bed side step.
• Ford Telematics™*.
• Hitch balls and towbars.
• Interior cargo organization and
management.
• In-vehicle safe*.
• Racks and carriers*.
• Rear-seat entertainment*.
• Smoker's package.
• Sportliner cargo liner*.
• Tonneau covers*.
• Towing mirrors.
• Trailer brake controller.
• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
• Truck bed camping tent*.
• Truck bed cargo organization and
management.
• Wireless charging*.
Peace of mind
• Back-up alarm*.
• Bed hooks*.
• Bumper- and hitch-mounted parking
sensors*.
• Keyless entry keypad.
• Locking fuel plug.
448
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Accessories
• Protective seat covers*.
• Remote start.
• Tool or cargo boxes*.
• Vehicle security systems.
• Wheel locks.
• Wheel well liners.
Footnote
*Ford Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor
Company engineering requirements.
Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty
from the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
449
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Accessories
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did
not design them specifically for
automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability,
and may adversely affect the
performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
450
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S.
Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have
discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended
service plan backed by Ford Motor
Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended
service plan authorized and backed by Ford
Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle
was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
451
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an
affordable, no interest, no fee payment
program allowing you all the security and
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying
over time. You are pre-approved with no
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more,
call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
(CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
452
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
453
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil
change. See (page 108).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 miles (8000
kilometers) from your last oil change.
Never exceed one year or 10000 miles
(16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’ s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
454
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
455
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
456
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings (Four–wheel
drive vehicles).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
457
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
Other maintenance items
1
Replace engine air filter.
Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
458
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing in the
information display.
• Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)). Perform
the engine air filter replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
459
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Off-road operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate
if equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (Two-wheel drive vehicles).
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change interval
460
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case (4X4 only) fluid
changes or level checks are not required
unless a leak is suspected or the assembly
has been submerged in water. During long
periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) or at
wide-open throttle for long periods above
45 mph (72 km/h), change the rear axle
fluid every 3,000 mi (4,800 km) or three
months, whichever comes first, if the rear
axle is filled with non-synthetic fluid. This
interval can be waived and the 150,000 mi
(240,000km) service interval can continue
if the rear axle is filled with 75W85
synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSS-M2C9Y2-A, part
number XY-75W85-QL, or equivalent. Add
friction modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or
equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
461
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
462
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
463
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
464
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
465
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
466
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
467
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
468
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
469
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
470
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
471
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
472
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
473
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
474
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
475
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (i) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
476
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
477
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
478
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim. Arbitration fees and incentives.
• i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’ s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(i) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
479
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
480
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
481
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
482
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
483
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
484
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
485
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
486
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
487
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
RF Certification Logos for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
E207816
Argentina
E207817
Abu Dhabi, Dubai
E197509
E202555
Brazil
E207818
European Union EU
E207819
Jordan
E207820
Malaysia
488
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
E197811
Moldova
E207821
Morocco
E198001
Philippines
E197844
Serbia
E207822
Singapore
E198002
South Africa
E203899
489
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
E203679
Taiwan
E198009
Ukraine
490
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Appendices
3
360 Degree Camera.....................................217
Camera Views......................................................218
Front Camera.......................................................218
Side Camera.........................................................219
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................188
A
A/C
See: Climate Control.........................................139
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................198
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................198
Accessories...................................................448
Exterior style.......................................................448
Interior style.........................................................448
Lifestyle.................................................................448
Peace of mind....................................................448
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation.............................................11
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............221
Active Park Assist.........................................210
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space..................................................................212
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature..........212
Troubleshooting the System..........................213
Using Active Park Assist....................................211
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................321
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................322
Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................321
Adjusting the Pedals......................................81
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................78
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column................................................................78
Airbag Disposal..............................................50
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control.........................................139
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............329
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................74
Ambient Lighting.............................................91
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................74
Arming the Alarm.................................................75
Disarming the Alarm...........................................75
Full Guard ...............................................................75
Reduced Guard......................................................74
Appendices.....................................................472
Audible Warnings and Indicators............107
Airbag Secondary Warning.............................107
Beltminder Warning...........................................107
Door Ajar Warning..............................................107
Headlamps On Warning...................................107
Key in Ignition Warning.....................................107
Keyless Warning Alert.......................................107
Parking Brake On Warning..............................107
Rear Park Aid Warning......................................107
Service Advancetrac Warning........................107
Audio Control...................................................79
Media........................................................................79
Seek, Next or Previous........................................79
Audio System................................................392
General Information.........................................392
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio............................400
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD...................................................................395
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
SYNC.............................................................398
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/
FM...................................................................393
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
FM/CD..........................................................402
Autolamps........................................................84
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................85
Automatic Climate Control........................141
Automatic High Beam Control.................86
Activating the System........................................87
Manually Overriding the System....................87
491
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
Automatic Transmission............................182
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................185
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................187
Understanding the Shift Positions of a
6–Speed Automatic Transmission.........182
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission.........................184
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check..............................................................317
Auto-Start-Stop............................................172
Disabling Auto StartStop.................................173
Enabling Auto StartStop..................................172
Autowipers.......................................................82
Auxiliary Power Points................................162
110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC Power
Outlet.................................................................162
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................162
Locations...............................................................162
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery......................318
Bed Access.....................................................248
Box Side Step......................................................248
Bed Extender...................................................70
Grocery Mode..........................................................71
Tailgate Mode........................................................70
Bed Ramps....................................................249
Installing the Ramp Holder.............................251
Stowing the Bed Ramp...................................250
Using the Bed Ramp........................................249
Blind Spot Information System..............232
Switching the System Off and On..............234
System Errors......................................................234
Using the System...............................................232
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........307
Booster Seats..................................................28
Types of Booster Seats......................................28
Brake Fluid Check.........................................318
Brakes...............................................................198
General Information..........................................198
Breaking-In......................................................281
Bulb Specification Chart...........................327
C
Cabin Air Filter................................................145
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................374
Specifications......................................................375
Capacities and Specifications -
3.5L................................................................382
Specifications.....................................................383
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................378
Specifications......................................................379
Capacities and Specifications -
5.0L................................................................387
Specifications.....................................................388
Capacities and Specifications................370
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................330
Center Console..............................................164
Changing a Bulb...........................................322
Accessing the Halogen High Beam, Low
Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs..................................................................323
Lamp Assembly Condensation....................323
Replacing Brake, Rear, Direction Indicator
and Reverse Lamp Bulbs...........................325
Replacing Cargo Lamp and High-mount
Brake Lamp Bulbs........................................326
Replacing Exterior Mounted Mirror Direction
Indicator Lamp Bulbs...................................327
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs............................325
Replacing LED Brake, Rear, Direction
Indicator and Reverse Lamp
Bulbs..................................................................326
Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, Spot Lamp and
High-mount Brake Lamp Bulbs..............326
Replacing LED Direction Indicator and Side
Marker Bulbs...................................................325
Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs..................325
Replacing Side Marker Bulb...........................325
Replacing the Halogen High Beam, Low
Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs..................................................................324
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
Bulb....................................................................326
Changing a Fuse..........................................306
Fuses......................................................................306
492
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
Changing a Road Wheel............................361
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................361
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools.........362
Tire Change Procedure....................................363
Changing the 12V Battery..........................318
Battery Management System......................320
Changing the Engine Air Filter................329
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................320
Checking MyKey System Status...............59
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................320
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................41
Child Restraint Positioning.........................30
Child Safety.......................................................15
General Information.............................................15
Child Safety Locks...........................................31
Left-Hand Side......................................................32
Right-Hand Side...................................................32
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................334
With King Ranch Edition.................................334
Without King Ranch Edition..........................334
Cleaning Products.......................................330
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................335
Cleaning the Engine....................................332
Cleaning the Exterior..................................330
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................331
Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................331
Stripes or Graphics.............................................331
Underbody.............................................................331
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................333
Cleaning the Interior...................................333
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................332
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................58
Climate Control.............................................139
Climate Controlled Seats..........................155
Cooled Seats........................................................156
Collision Warning System........................238
Principle Of Operation.....................................238
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check.............................313
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......49
Creating a MyKey...........................................58
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................58
Cross Traffic Alert........................................234
False Alerts...........................................................237
Switching the System Off and On...............237
System Errors.......................................................237
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................236
System Limitations...........................................236
Using the System...............................................234
Cruise Control.................................................80
Principle of Operation......................................220
Type 1........................................................................80
Type 2.......................................................................80
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control...............................220
Customer Assistance..................................291
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................9
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps............................86
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable).......................................86
Type 2 - Configurable.........................................86
Digital Radio.................................................404
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting...........................................405
Direction Indicators.......................................88
Lane Change..........................................................88
Driver Alert......................................................228
Using Driver Alert...............................................228
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................44
Children and Airbags..........................................44
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................44
Driving Aids....................................................228
Driving Hints...................................................281
Driving Through Water...............................282
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps........................86
E
Economical Driving......................................281
493
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
Electric Parking Brake.................................199
Applying the Electric Parking Brake............199
Applying the Electric Parking Brake When
the Vehicle is Moving..................................200
Battery With No Charge...................................201
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake.........200
Electronic Locking Differential................196
Activating the Electronic Locking
Differential.......................................................196
Electronic Tailgate..........................................67
With the Outside Control Button...................67
With the Remote Control..................................67
Emission Control System...........................179
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................180
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................181
End User License Agreement..................472
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................472
Engine Block Heater....................................170
Using the Engine Block Heater........................171
Engine Coolant Check.................................313
Adding Engine Coolant.....................................314
Checking the Engine Coolant.........................313
Recycled Engine Coolant.................................314
Severe Climates..................................................315
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling...............................................................315
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................72
Engine Oil Check...........................................312
Adding Engine Oil................................................312
Engine Oil Dipstick........................................312
Engine Specifications................................370
Drivebelt Routing...............................................370
Environment......................................................14
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake.............................199
Essential Towing Checks..........................269
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................275
Hitches...................................................................270
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................276
Safety Chains........................................................271
Trailer Brakes.........................................................271
Trailer Lamps.......................................................275
Trailer Towing Connector................................270
Using a Step Bumper........................................275
When Towing a Trailer......................................275
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options..................................13
Extended Service Plan (ESP)..................451
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA
ONLY)................................................................452
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S.
Only)...................................................................451
Exterior Mirrors................................................93
360-Degree Camera...........................................95
Auto-dimming Feature (if equipped)..........95
Blind Spot Information System......................96
Clearance Lamps ................................................95
Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................95
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................93
Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................95
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)..........................................................96
Memory Mirrors ....................................................95
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................93
Power-Folding Mirrors........................................94
Puddle Lamps.......................................................95
Spot Lamps............................................................95
F
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................34
Fastening the Cinch Tongue.............................35
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt................................37
Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................38
Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................36
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........35
Using the Safety Belt with Cinch Tongue
(Front Center Seat)........................................34
Floor Mats.......................................................282
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................88
494
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals..................................81
Ford Credit..........................................................11
(U.S. Only).................................................................11
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................188
Front Fog Lamps............................................88
Front Passenger Sensing System............45
Front Seat Armrest.......................................157
Fuel and Refueling........................................174
Fuel Consumption........................................178
Calculating Fuel Economy...............................179
Filling the Tank.....................................................179
Fuel Filter.........................................................318
Fuel Quality.....................................................175
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................175
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles..............................................................175
Fuel Shutoff...................................................287
Fuses................................................................298
Fuse Specification Chart..........................298
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel.................................................................303
Power Distribution Box....................................298
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........158
Gauges.............................................................100
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge...........102
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge..............................102
Fuel Gauge............................................................102
Information Display...........................................103
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge.................................................................103
Type 1 and 2..........................................................100
Type 3......................................................................101
General Information on Radio
Frequencies....................................................51
Intelligent Access..................................................51
General Maintenance Information.......453
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................455
Owner Checks and Services..........................454
Protecting Your Investment...........................453
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................453
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................453
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................294
Getting the Services You Need................291
Away From Home...............................................291
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake.............................................198
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................287
HDC
See: Using Hill Descent Control...................207
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps......................321
Head Restraints.............................................147
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................148
Heated Seats.................................................154
Rear Heated Seats.............................................155
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................145
Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................145
Heated Rear Window........................................145
Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................139
Hill Start Assist..............................................201
Switching the System On and Off..............202
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................201
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................142
Cooling the Interior Quickly............................144
General Hints........................................................142
Heating the Interior Quickly............................143
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........144
Recommended Settings for Heating..........144
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................145
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................198
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........307
I
Ignition Switch...............................................166
In California (U.S. Only).............................292
Information Display Control......................80
Information Displays...................................108
General Information..........................................108
495
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
Information Messages................................124
4WD.........................................................................137
Active Park.............................................................125
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................125
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control..............126
Airbag......................................................................126
Alarm and Security............................................126
Battery and Charging System.........................127
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.....................................................127
Collision Warning System...............................128
Doors and Locks..................................................128
Driver Alert.............................................................128
Drivetrain................................................................129
Engine.....................................................................129
Fuel..........................................................................129
Keys and Intelligent Access............................130
Lane Keeping System.........................................131
Maintenance..........................................................131
MyKey......................................................................132
Off Road.................................................................132
Park Aid...................................................................133
Park Brake..............................................................133
Power Steering....................................................134
Pro Trailer Backup Assist.................................134
Remote Start........................................................135
Seats.......................................................................136
Starting System .................................................136
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................136
Trailer.......................................................................137
Installing Child Restraints............................16
Child Seats...............................................................16
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats....................................................................25
Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment
(Regular Cab)...................................................26
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew
Cab and Super Cab).......................................27
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use) .....................................................24
Using Inflatable Safety Belts (Rear Seat
Outboard Positions)........................................21
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front
Center Position of Super Cab and Crew
Cab).......................................................................17
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center
Position of Super Cab and Crew
Cab).......................................................................19
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................23
Using Tether Straps.............................................25
Instrument Cluster......................................100
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................85
Interior Lamps.................................................89
Front Interior Lamps...........................................89
Rear Interior Lamps..............................................91
Interior Mirror....................................................97
Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................97
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................288
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................288
Jump Starting.....................................................289
Preparing Your Vehicle....................................288
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................289
K
Keyless Entry...................................................64
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD..............................................................64
Keyless Starting............................................166
Ignition Modes......................................................167
Keys and Remote Controls..........................51
496
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
L
Lane Keeping System................................228
Switching the System On and Off..............229
Lighting Control..............................................84
Headlamp Flasher...............................................84
High Beams............................................................84
Lighting..............................................................84
Load Carrying.................................................241
Load Limit.......................................................242
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................248
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................242
Load Retaining Fixtures..............................241
BoxLink™ Cleats.................................................241
Locking and Unlocking.................................62
Activating Intelligent Access............................63
Autolock and Autounlock.................................64
Battery Saver.........................................................64
Illuminated Entry..................................................64
Power Door Locks................................................62
Remote Control....................................................62
Smart Unlock.........................................................63
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................63
Locks...................................................................62
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................361
M
Maintenance..................................................307
General Information.........................................307
Manual Climate Control.............................139
Manual Seats.................................................149
Manual Lumbar ..................................................150
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................149
Recline Adjustment...........................................150
Manual Tailgate...............................................67
Media Hub.....................................................409
Memory Function..........................................152
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................153
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key.............153
Saving a PreSet Position..................................153
Message Center
See: Information Displays...............................108
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors..............145
See: Windows and Mirrors................................92
Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof..........................................................98
Bounce-Back.........................................................99
Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............98
Motorcraft Parts............................................371
MyKey Troubleshooting..............................60
MyKey™.............................................................57
Principle of Operation.........................................57
N
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........456
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor.............................456
Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................457
O
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................312
Opening and Closing the Hood..............307
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................295
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........296
Overhead Console.......................................165
P
Parking Aid.....................................................209
Rear Sensing System.......................................209
Parking Aids..................................................209
Parking Brake.................................................198
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................72
SecuriLock™...........................................................72
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................72
Pedals..................................................................81
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................42
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................42
Post-Crash Alert System..........................290
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................62
497
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
Power Running Boards.................................76
Power Seats...................................................150
Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active
Motion ................................................................151
Power Lumbar......................................................151
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................318
Power Windows..............................................92
Accessory Delay....................................................93
Bounce-Back.........................................................92
One-Touch Up or Down.....................................92
Window Lock.........................................................93
Protecting the Environment........................14
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™......................253
Principle of Operation......................................253
Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup Assist.........254
Troubleshooting.................................................258
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist....................256
R
Rear Axle.........................................................196
Rear Seat Armrest........................................157
Rear Seats.......................................................154
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion ..............154
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position..............................................................154
Rear View Camera........................................214
Using the Rear View Camera System.........215
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................214
Recommended Towing Weights...........262
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle..............................269
Refueling...........................................................177
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.................177
Remote Control...............................................51
Car Finder................................................................55
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters ...................51
Intelligent Access Key.........................................52
Memory Feature...................................................54
Remote Start ........................................................55
Replacing the Battery.........................................52
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................55
Remote Start.................................................146
Automatic Settings............................................146
Removing the Tailgate.................................68
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............335
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.........................................11
Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs...................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................56
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................296
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only).............................................................296
Roadside Assistance..................................286
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................286
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage.................287
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................287
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................286
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................286
Roadside Emergencies.............................286
Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................281
Running Out of Fuel.....................................176
Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................176
S
Safety Canopy™............................................48
Safety Precautions.......................................174
Satellite Radio.............................................406
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)................................................................408
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............407
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service..................407
Troubleshooting................................................408
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........462
Scheduled Maintenance...........................453
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................38
Seatbelt Reminder........................................39
Belt-Minder™........................................................39
Seatbelts...........................................................33
Principle of Operation.........................................33
498
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................39
Conditions of operation.....................................39
Seats..................................................................147
Security...............................................................72
Side Airbags......................................................47
Sitting in the Correct Position..................147
Sliding Windows.............................................97
Power Sliding Back Window............................97
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................355
Snowplowing................................................283
Engine Temperature while Plowing............285
Installing the Snowplow.................................283
Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow
Attached..........................................................284
Outside Air Temperature While
Plowing.............................................................285
Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped
Vehicle..............................................................284
Snowplow Mode................................................284
Transmission Operation while
Plowing.............................................................285
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
Special Instructions..............................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................459
Exceptions.............................................................461
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................220
Spot Lamps.....................................................88
Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps..................89
Stability Control...........................................204
Principle of Operation.....................................204
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................166
Starting a Gasoline Engine........................167
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................169
Failure to Start.....................................................168
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................170
Important Ventilating Information...............170
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................169
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................169
Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................167
Vehicles with Keyless Start............................168
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........166
General Information..........................................166
Steering............................................................237
Electric Power Steering....................................237
Steering Wheel................................................78
Storage Compartments.............................164
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................98
Sun Visors..........................................................97
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................98
Supplementary Restraints System.........43
Principle of Operation........................................43
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................426
911 Assist...............................................................426
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................428
SYNC™............................................................410
General Information..........................................410
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................440
T
Tailgate Lock....................................................67
Manual Tailgate Lock .........................................67
Remote Control Tailgate Lock.........................67
Tailgate Step....................................................69
Closing the Step...................................................69
Opening the Step.................................................69
Tailgate...............................................................67
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............370
Terrain Response.........................................207
Principle of Operation......................................207
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................293
Tire Care.........................................................340
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................341
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................340
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................342
Temperature A B C.............................................341
Traction AA A B C..............................................340
Treadwear............................................................340
499
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........356
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System........................................357
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System .......................................357
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................338
Towing a Trailer.............................................252
Load Placement.................................................252
Towing Points................................................276
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels..........................................................278
Emergency Towing............................................278
Recreational Towing.........................................278
Towing..............................................................252
Traction Control...........................................203
Principle of Operation......................................203
Trailer Sway Control...................................262
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................317
Transmission Code Designation.............373
Transmission..................................................182
Transmission
See: Transmission..............................................182
Transporting the Vehicle............................277
Type Approvals............................................488
RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s).................................488
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™................................................308
2.7L EcoBoost.....................................................308
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................309
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................310
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L.....................311
Unique Driving Characteristics.................172
Universal Garage Door Opener...............158
HomeLink Wireless Control System...........158
USB Port.........................................................409
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................221
Blocked Sensor...................................................226
Changing the Set Speed.................................224
Detection Issues.................................................225
Disengaging the System.................................224
Following a Vehicle............................................222
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................225
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation...........225
Overriding the System.....................................224
Resuming the Set Speed................................224
Setting a Speed..................................................222
Setting the Gap Distance................................223
Switching the System Off...............................225
Switching the System On...............................222
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........227
System Not Available.......................................226
Using Cruise Control...................................220
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................221
Switching Cruise Control On and Off.........220
Using Four-Wheel Drive............................188
4WD Indicator Lights........................................188
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles..............................................................191
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles..............................................................191
Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD
System..............................................................189
Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD
system...............................................................188
Using Hill Descent Control.......................207
Hill descent modes...........................................207
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................60
Using Power Running Boards....................76
Automatic Power Deploy..................................76
Automatic Power Stow......................................76
Bounce-back..........................................................77
Enabling and Disabling......................................76
Manual Power Deploy.........................................76
Using Snow Chains.....................................355
Using Stability Control..............................205
AdvanceTrac™ with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC™)............................................................205
500
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player.............................................................431
Accessing Your USB Song Library...............435
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings.............................................................437
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port............................................................431
Media Menu Features......................................435
Media Voice Commands.................................432
USB 2......................................................................437
Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........438
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............414
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu..................................................................419
Accessing Your Phone Settings....................422
Bluetooth Devices.............................................423
Making Calls..........................................................417
Pairing a Phone for the First Time................414
Pairing Subsequent Phones...........................415
Phone Options during an Active Call..........418
Phone Voice Commands.................................416
Receiving Calls....................................................418
System Settings.................................................424
Text Messaging..................................................420
Using Traction Control...............................203
Switching the System Off .............................203
System Indicator Lights and
Messages.........................................................203
Using Voice Recognition............................412
Initiating a Voice Session.................................412
System Interaction and Feedback...............413
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................294
V
Vehicle Care...................................................330
General Information.........................................330
Vehicle Certification Label........................372
Vehicle Identification Number.................371
Vehicle Storage............................................336
Battery....................................................................337
Body........................................................................336
Brakes.....................................................................337
Cooling system...................................................336
Engine....................................................................336
Fuel system..........................................................336
General..................................................................336
Miscellaneous......................................................337
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................337
Tires.........................................................................337
Ventilation
See: Climate Control.........................................139
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number..............371
Voice Control...................................................80
501
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators...............103
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................103
Anti-Lock Braking System...............................103
Automatic High Beam......................................103
Auto Start-stop...................................................103
Battery....................................................................104
Blind Spot Monitor.............................................104
Brake System.......................................................104
Check 4X4............................................................104
Cruise Control......................................................104
Direction Indicator..............................................104
Door Ajar................................................................104
Electric Park Brake.............................................104
Electronic Locking Differential......................104
Engine Coolant Temperature........................104
Engine Oil..............................................................105
Fasten Safety Belt..............................................105
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators..........................105
Front Airbag..........................................................105
Front Fog Lamps................................................105
High Beam............................................................105
Hill Descent..........................................................105
Low Fuel Level.....................................................105
Low Tire Pressure Warning.............................105
Parking Lamps....................................................106
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control.........106
Service Engine Soon.........................................106
Sport Mode...........................................................106
Traction and Stability Control.......................106
Traction and Stability Control Off...............106
Transmission Tow/Haul...................................107
Washer Fluid Check.....................................318
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................330
See: Wipers and Washers.................................82
Waxing..............................................................331
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................361
Wheels and Tires.........................................338
General Information.........................................338
Technical Specifications.................................369
Windows and Mirrors....................................92
Windshield Washers.....................................83
Windshield Wipers.........................................82
Speed dependent wipers (if
equipped)..........................................................82
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................320
Wipers and Washers.....................................82
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle........................277
502
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 08/2015, First Printing
Index
